JP6550422B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a drum game machine (slot machine) and a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine).

  Conventionally, a game console provided with operation means has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application No. 2008-200302

However, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in the operation means.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by operation means.

A game stand according to the present invention is a game stand provided with operation means and effect means, and the operation means is means provided at a position where the player can operate, and the effect means is It is a means capable of outputting a plurality of types of sounds, one of the plurality of types of sounds is a first sound, and one of the plurality of types of sounds is a second sound. The first sound aspect and the second sound aspect are different aspects, and the first sound is a case where the operation means is operated in a certain operation aspect in the first button effect Is the first sound whose output is started according to the operation, and the second sound is output according to the operation when the operation means is operated in a certain operation mode in the second button effect the first is a sound, wherein the first button directing the second button effect another button but is initiated And the output, the certain operation mode is pressed once rather than long press operation, time and the operation timing of the operating means until the output start timing of the second sound, the operation timing of the operation means The time from the first sound output start timing to the first sound output timing is a different time.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the operation means.

It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at a game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second secondary control unit. It is a figure explaining the outline of other embodiments. It is a figure explaining the outline of transmission and reception of data of other embodiments. (A) It is a schematic diagram explaining transmission and reception of data of other embodiments. (B) It is a figure which shows the structure of a transmission data buffer. (C) It is a figure which shows the structure of the transmission buffer for DMA transfer. (D) It is a figure which shows the structure of the queue for reception. (E) It is a figure which shows the structure of the delivery queue. (F) It is a figure which shows a command system. It is a flowchart explaining the flow of command analysis processing of other embodiments. (A) It is a flowchart explaining the flow of the 2nd secondary control part main processing of other embodiments. (B) It is a flowchart explaining the flow of power on initial processing of other embodiment. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the setting screen. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the structure of a common drawing effect. (C)-(e) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of a setting screen and a common drawing effect. (A) It is the time chart which showed the flow of the usual common drawing production. (B) It is a time chart which showed an example of the flow of the sound outputted from sound output means, the special figure change game, the common drawing effect, and the setting screen. (C) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of a special figure change game, a common drawing effect, and a setting screen. It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of a common drawing effect and a setting screen. It is a figure showing a concrete example of a setting screen. It is the figure which showed an example of the common drawing effect in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the common drawing effect in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the common drawing effect in setting screen display in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the common drawing effect in setting screen display in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the common drawing effect in setting screen display in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the common drawing effect in setting screen display in time series. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed an example of the movement aspect of the movable body. (E) It is the figure which showed the modification of the shape of the movable body. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the movement start opportunity of movable body CB. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the movement start of movable body CB. It is the time chart which showed an example of the movement timing of movable object CB. It is a state transition diagram showing an example of an operation state of a mobile. (A)-(k) It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (L)-(p) It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (A)-(k) It is the figure which showed the specific example 3 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (A)-(h) It is the figure which showed the specific example 4 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (A)-(h) It is the figure which showed the specific example 5 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the function of the operation means in each state. It is the figure which showed an example of the operation means. It is the figure which showed an example of the structure of the operation means. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the internal structure of the operation information storage area. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation information queue. It is the figure which showed the example of the function of the operation means in time series. It is the figure which showed the example of the function of the operation means in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of an operation means. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is a circuit block diagram of other embodiments. (A) It is the schematic which shows the structure of the data of other embodiment. (B) It is a schematic diagram of the command of other embodiments. (C) It is a timing chart explaining the situation of transmission and reception of the command of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the button effect of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the button effect of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the button effect of other embodiment. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the character change production of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of the character change production of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of the character change production of other embodiments. It is the figure which showed the character change production | generation display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the character change production | generation display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the character change production | generation display of other embodiment in time series. It is an example of the setting screen of other embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow of data transmission and reception of the 1st control means (the 1st sub control part 400) and the 2nd control means (liquid crystal control part 700), and the composition of each storage area (buffer). It is the schematic which showed an example of the flow of transmission / reception of a command. (A) A flowchart showing a flow of first sub control unit main processing. (B) A flowchart showing a flow of command reception interrupt processing. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of 1 ms timer interruption processing. (D) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of 10 ms timer interruption processing. (E) A flowchart showing the flow of DMA interrupt processing. (A) A flow chart showing the flow of effect control main loop processing. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of transmission data setting processing. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of liquid crystal control communication driver processing. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of liquid crystal control communication driver processing. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of liquid crystal control data analysis processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the flow of index determination according to the first embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the flow of index determination according to the second embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the flow of index determination according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the packetization process which concerns on a modification. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of liquid crystal control data analysis processing concerning a modification. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the flow of index determination according to the fourth embodiment.

  << First Embodiment >>

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail.
<Overall configuration>

  First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.
<The back of the game table>

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.
<Front of the game board>

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is hit and stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning hole 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and the ball can not be inserted while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display device wins the special view display game with a large hit symbol. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.
<Rendering device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) is provided to pivot the forearm 224b to a position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.
<Control unit>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) which are used as hardware random number counters that change numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It is assumed that a counter is built in), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the lower-side full-tank sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of common drawing display device 210, various state display unit 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, first special drawing holding lamp 218, second special drawing holding lamp 220, high confidence) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the second special view starting port 232 and the door members 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the signal is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 232, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of shielding device 246, chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of chance button 136, shielding device sensor 430 and chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 which outputs a detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read to generate a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 VDP 434 (displaying an image on the symbol display device 208) Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (c). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. The same figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention.

  Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), ten types of special figures from "Special figure A" to "Special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation stop display, and the white parts in the figure turn off The locations of the segments to be displayed are indicated, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined up three times To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in the same figure (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not abnormal) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt is not generated (the processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in the above-mentioned step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a winning on the second special view start port 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is the special figure 2 random number value The value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 5 (c) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Also, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first lost flag, a second lost flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 5A, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Probability fluctuation flag is off, 普If the ratio fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, if the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure G, if the second small hitting flag is on, the special figure H, the first off flag is on In such a case, the special segment I and the second outlier flag are on so that the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off so that the respective special symbol I is configured, In the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the second out-of-place design (special figure J) the fixed display of any one of the design is done. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the jackpot game, a number of games in the second special view starting slot 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, which is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to

On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process described above.
<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S311, button control processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this button control process, when an operation by the operating means is detected, various processes corresponding to the operating means are performed. For example, when the operation by the chance button 136 is detected, a process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 into effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed. In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.
<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.
In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S901 of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

  <Other Embodiments (In the first processing, the received command is stored in the storage unit, and in the second processing, the self-generated command is stored in the storage unit)>

  Next, another embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14 (in the first process, the received command is stored in the storage means, and in the second process, the self-generated command is stored in the storage means). A game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a torso game machine such as a slot machine) according to the embodiment will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 14 are basically used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in 10 to 14 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, the same reference numerals as those in the above embodiment are used for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and is a schematic view showing an example of command transmission and reception in the control means (for example, the second sub control unit 500). The figure (a) is an example of command transmission / reception in the normal case, and the figure (b) is an example of command transmission / reception at the time of power on.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data, for example, in the first sub-control unit main processing, the first sub-control unit 400 executes The control command is set to be output and transmitted to the second sub control unit 500.

  The second secondary control unit 500 stores it in storage means (a command storage area (command buffer) for storing a command). Then, in the command processing of the second sub control unit main processing, for example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is serial communication Output to control circuit.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the power is turned on, the second sub control unit 500 stores the self-generated command (self-generated command) in the command buffer, and performs predetermined processing based on the self-generated command. Run. Then, in the command processing of the second sub control unit main processing, for example, there is an instruction (operation confirmation instruction after power on) to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame 542 from the first sub control unit 400 In this case, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit.

  The self-generated command in the present embodiment is, for example, a command processed based on a transmitted / received command (for example, a command processed based on a plurality of commands included in a single command transmitted / received) Or a command directly generated by applying a predetermined mask or the like.

  Continuing on, FIG. 11 is a view for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, in which commands are transmitted / received between the first control means (first sub-control unit 400) and the second control means (for example, second sub-control unit 500). FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing an example of FIG. The figures (a) to (e) are examples of command transmission and reception in the normal case, and the figures (f) and (g) are examples of command transmission and reception when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 transmit and receive commands via the command communication line.

  The same figure (b)-the same figure (e) are the 1st storage area (for example, command storage area 408c provided in RAM408 of the 1st sub control part 400), and the 2nd storage area (for example, 2nd sub area). It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of command transmission / reception with the command storage area 508c provided in RAM508 of the control part 500. FIG.

  As shown in (b) of the figure, when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300, the command output from the main control unit 300 in the command reception interrupt process (reception command 1 to 3) are received, command analysis is performed, and the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 is stored.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 7C and 7D, the first sub control unit 400 sequentially receives the reception command 1 and the reception command 2 (single transmission commands respectively) stored in the command storage area 408c in the command output process. 2 Output to the sub control unit 500.

  When the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 receives a command output from the first sub-control unit 400 in command reception interrupt processing and analyzes the command. For example, it is stored in the command storage area 508 c provided in the RAM 508 as execution commands 1 and 2 for the game board lamp 532 and the game stand frame lamp 542.

  The figure (e) is an example in case the receiving commands 2 and 3 are continuous sending commands, for example. The continuous transmission command is a multi-byte command including a plurality of instructions (single transmission command). For example, in the case of a 2-byte continuous send command, the first byte is the first single send command (receive command 2) and the second byte is the second single send command (receive command 3), and these are 1 It transmits by serial command communication of the number of times.

  On the other hand, as shown in (f) and (g) in the figure, the first sub-control unit 400 does not transmit a command to the second sub-control unit 500 after the power is turned on, and the second sub-control unit 500 For example, execution commands 1 and 2 for the game board lamp 532 and the game stand frame lamp 542 are generated by itself and stored in the command storage area 508 c provided in the RAM 508. When a predetermined command is received from the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 may self-generate a command.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the flow of data transmission and reception between the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 and the configuration of each storage area (buffer).

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the first sub-control unit 400 includes a transmission data buffer 702 and a transmission buffer 704 for direct memory access (DMA) transfer, and the second sub-control unit 500 includes a reception queue 706. , And a delivery queue 708.

  The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 sets data in the transmission data buffer 702 in the case of “transmittable” with reference to the status register of the serial communication circuit built in the CPU 404. The serial communication circuit of the CPU 404 transmits a command to be transmitted to the second secondary control unit 500 stored in the transmission data buffer 702 to the DMA transfer transmission buffer 704. When the CPU 404 instructs the DMA controller to address the transfer destination and then instructs to start transfer, transfer of the command is started. The transferred data is written to the reception queue 706 of the serial communication circuit built in the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 refers to the status register and reads the received data from the reception queue 706 when “reception complete” is obtained. The second sub control unit 500 performs command analysis processing of the received data, and when transmitting the command to the outside (for example, the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542), transfers it to the delivery queue 708 .

  As shown in (b) of the figure, the transmission data buffer 702 is composed of data length, identification type, and actual data, and as shown in (c) of the figure, the DMA transfer transmission buffer 704 has start information and data. The reception queue 706 is made up of start information, data length, identification type, real data, and a checksum as shown in (d) of FIG. As shown in e), the delivery queue 708 is composed of identification type and actual data. Also, as shown in (f) of the figure, in the command system, for example, 0000 to DFFF indicate command transmission from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, and E000 to FFFF indicate the second sub control unit. 7 shows command transmission from 500 to the first sub control unit 400.

The first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 each have a plurality of storage areas, and when storing a command in each storage area, unnecessary information may be removed and stored. .
<Command analysis process>

  The command analysis process in the second secondary control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an example of a flowchart showing a flow of command analysis processing.

  The second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the first sub control unit 400, and performs command analysis processing if there is unanalyzed data.

  In step SA01, the reception command is acquired from the reception queue 706 of the second sub control unit 500. At step SA02, the acquired received command is analyzed. In step SA03, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first type command (for example, single-send command). If it is the first type command, the process proceeds to step SA09, and if not, Proceed to step SA04. In step SA09, the command after analysis is set in the delivery queue 708.

  In step SA04 following step SA03, it is determined whether or not it is a second type command (for example, the first byte of a 2-byte continuous transmission command), and a second type command (for example, a 2-byte series) If it is the first byte of the send command, the process proceeds to step SA05. If not, the process proceeds to step SA11.

  In step SA05, the reception command is acquired from the reception queue 706 of the second sub control unit 500. At step SA06, the acquired received command is analyzed. In step SA07, it is determined whether or not the received command is a second type command (for example, the second byte of a 2-byte continuous transmission command), and a second type command (for example, a 2-byte series) If it is the second byte of the send command, the process proceeds to step SA08. If not, the process proceeds to step SA11.

  In step SA08, a predetermined command is generated (processed) based on the plurality of commands (the first byte command and the second byte command) of the second type command. In the present embodiment, the processed command is described as a self-generated command based on the command of the first byte and the command of the second byte in this manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The command may be a command directly generated by (for example, a command generated by applying a predetermined mask).

At step SA10, the generated command is set in the delivery queue. In step SA11, other command analysis processing is performed, and the processing ends.
<Second sub control unit main processing>

  The second sub control unit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. The figure (a) is an example of the flow chart which shows the flow of the 2nd secondary control part main processing, and the figure (b) is an example of the flow chart which shows the flow of power on initialization processing.

  First, in step SA01 of the main processing of the second sub control unit 500, power on initialization processing is executed. This will be described later.

  In step SB02, it is determined whether the counter CNT is 33 or more, and this process is repeated until the counter CNT reaches 33. When the counter CNT becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step SB03. In step SB03, 0 is substituted into the counter CNT.

In step SB04, other second sub control unit main processing is performed. Specifically, command processing is performed, and the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 or not. In addition, effect control processing is performed, for example, when there is a new command in the command processing, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data needs to be updated. Perform the process of updating the effect data. Further, when there is an instruction from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542, this instruction is output as a serial communication control circuit. If there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, the command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step SB02.
<Power-on initialization process>

  The power-on initialization process will be described with reference to FIG. When power is turned on, initialization processing is executed in power-on initialization processing.

  In step SC01, a command related to initialization processing (for example, initialization of input / output port, initialization processing of storage area in RAM 508, etc.) is set in a predetermined queue of the second sub control unit 500. In step SC02, initialization processing is performed based on the command set in the predetermined queue.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment includes the first control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), the second control unit (for example, the second sub-control unit 500), and the storage unit (for example). For example, a storage area provided in the RAM 508 of the second sub control unit 500), and the second control means at least includes the storage means. The second control means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of processing, and at least one of the plurality of types of processing is a first processing, and of the plurality of types of processing, At least one is the second process,

  At least one of the plurality of types of processing is a third processing, and the first processing is a command transmitted from the first control means (hereinafter referred to as "first command"). The second process is a process of storing the first command (the transmission command from the first sub control unit 400) in the storage unit, and the third process is a process of receiving The second command (for example, a self-generated command) is stored in the storage unit.

  The first control means is a means different from the main control means (main control unit 300) and the payout control means (payout control unit 600). The second control means is a means different from the main control means (main control unit 300) and the payout control means (payout control unit 600).

  Also, “the process of storing the first command in the storage means” refers to the command itself received by DMA, a command extracted from a specific part of the command, or a specific part of the command It is a process which memorizes things etc. which were derived by what and a predetermined table. Also, the second command is based on a plurality of commands (the first byte command and the second byte command) of the second type command in step SA08 of FIG. 5A. , It is a processed command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The command may be a command directly generated by the second sub control unit 500 (for example, a command generated by applying a predetermined mask).

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of movable bodies, and the second control means is a means capable of at least executing control of the plurality of movable bodies, and at least one of the plurality of types of processing is , The fourth process, at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, the effect movable body 224 or the like), and the fourth process includes the first movable body The process may include at least a process of initially operating the body (a first operation process), and the second command may be a command corresponding to the first operation process. In this case, the first operation process is a process of performing an initial operation after power-on such as at the time of opening a store, and is different from the initial operation in the return operation. That is, in the case of the return operation, the first operation processing is different from the first operation processing in that the return operation is performed at the time of the fluctuation stop or start, the return operation of one movable body at each change, and the like.

  The second sub control unit 500 can execute the fifth process, and the fifth process is a process of operating the first movable body (for example, a rendering process (second operation process). The second command may be a command not corresponding to the second operation process.

  The second process may be a process of storing information of a part of the first command in the storage unit.

  The second sub-control unit 500 is capable of executing the sixth process, at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is the second movable body, and the sixth process is performed by The second movable body may be a process including at least a process of initially operating the movable body. The pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of movable bodies, and performs an initial operation of the plurality of movable bodies at an initial operation (during a first operation process). Therefore, the second command number may change according to the number of movable bodies to be initially operated, or initial movement information of a plurality of movable bodies may be included in one second command. In addition, when the movable body operation command as the rendering process (second operation process) is received during the initial operation (during the first operation process), the movable body operation command is received between the plurality of second commands. It may be a structure which does not interrupt, and may be a structure which interrupts.

The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game console described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.
(Supplementary note)

  The game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a first control unit (for example, first sub-control unit 400), a second control unit (for example, second sub-control unit 500), and a memory. Means (for example, a storage area provided in the RAM 508 of the second sub control unit 500), the second control means being capable of executing the first processing, the second processing means The control means is capable of executing a second process, and the first process is a process of storing a first command in the storage means, and the second process stores the second command. The first command is a command received from the first control means, and the second command is a command generated by the second control means. It is a game stand that features it.

  With such a configuration, when the second process is performed, the time until the start of the game may be shorter than the first process.

  The second process may be a process performed at least after the power is turned on.

  With such a configuration, there may be a case where the time until the start of the game can be shortened after the power is turned on.

  Further, the first command is a command including a plurality of instructions (for example, a continuous transmission command), and the first process includes a process of generating a third command based on the plurality of instructions. It may be

  With such a configuration, the time required for serial command communication may be shortened.

  Also, the second control means can execute a third process, the second control means can execute a fourth process, and the third process stores the information in the storage means. Processing for transmitting the first command (for example, reception command) to the outside (for example, the game board lamp 532, the game stand frame lamp 542, the effect movable body 224, etc.), and the fourth process is The process of transmitting the second command (for example, a self-generated command) stored in the storage means to the outside (for example, the game board lamp 532, the game stand frame lamp 542, the effect movable body 224, etc.) It may be Further, the game console may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the time for transmitting a command to the outside (for example, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542, effect movable body 224, etc.) after power on. Therefore, the time of the operation check process after the power is turned on can be shortened, and the time to the start of the game may be shortened.

  In addition, the first storage means (storage area) is not limited to the area simply storing the command transmitted from the first control means, but has some kind of processing (processing) such as deleting unnecessary headers etc. The command may be saved.

  Also, in the first process, the command stored in the second storage unit (for example, the reception queue 706 of the first sub control unit 400) other than the first storage unit is taken out and the predetermined processing is performed. May be included at least.

  Also, the second process may at least include, for example, a process of self-generating a command for each initial operation.

  Also, the first command may be a transmission command from another control means (for example, the first control means).

  Also, the second command may be a self-generated command generated by the second control means. Also, a plurality of commands may be self-generated based on the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a power on command or the like) from another control means.

  Also, the transmission command from the other control means and the self-generated command of the second control means may be different command systems (for example, different from the upper 2 bytes of the 4 byte instruction, etc.).

  Also, there are first control means and second control means, the first control means is the first sub-control means 400 (or the second sub-control means 500), and the second control means is the liquid crystal control means 700, effect control means, payout control means 600, etc. may be used.

  Further, the first control means and the second control means may be capable of transmission and reception by serial communication.

  Further, the first control means is configured to transmit a command when it is determined that communication is possible with reference to a predetermined port of the second control means (for example, a state confirmation port indicating DMA transfer completion or the like). It is also good.

  The second control means may turn on a port indicating that transmission is possible after completion of the initial operation (for example, the initial operation of a character (movable object) or the operation of loading completion in liquid crystal control). In this case, when the port indicating that transmission is possible is not turned on even after the predetermined period has elapsed, the first control means internally determines that the communication is possible even if it is not turned on, and starts processing. It may be

  Also, if the command sent from the first control means is a continuous feed command, even if the second control means itself generates a command based on a plurality of commands included in the continuous feed command. Good.

  Further, the condition in the case where the second control means generates itself may be, for example, a case where a tool is connected and a command transmitted only from the tool is received, or in the case of an initial operation at the time of power on, etc. .

  When a command generated by the second control means is transmitted from the first control means, for example, if the command type matches, the process proceeds to a predetermined stage (to set the command in the execution queue) Or the processing may proceed to the end.

Further, the second control means may be a command which is self-generated, which is usually not sent from the first control means.
<Setting screen>

  Next, referring to FIG. 15A, the basic concept of the “setting screen” that can be displayed by the game console according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 15A is a diagram showing an example of the setting screen.

  The setting screen according to the present embodiment is a screen (display) configured by one or more display units, and is a screen (display) displayed on a display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). It is. For example, as shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and (1) and FIGS. 15 (a) and (2), the contents and purpose of the setting screen (for example, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, and the like) Title part TP showing character selection, BGM selection etc., input part IP for letting the player input input information (for example, password, numbers etc.), selection is possible by operation with operation means (for example, chance button 136) Selection part SP etc. is mentioned as an example.

  Further, as the setting screen according to the present embodiment, for example, a volume adjustment setting screen for adjusting the volume of the sound output means (for example, the speaker 120) of the game stand, a light output means (for example, a lamp) for the game stand Light amount adjustment setting screen for adjusting the light amount of the screen, password setting screen for inputting a password, selection screen for selecting a character or BGM, or game history reference screen for referring to the game history in the game console Etc. are mentioned as an example.

  Although the display start condition for starting the display of the setting screen is not particularly limited, for example, the display of the setting screen may be started when there is an operation by the first operation means in the power saving mode described later. The display of the setting screen may be started when the operation by the first operation unit is performed while the screen (for example, the demonstration screen) is displayed, and the first setting is performed when the operation by the first operation unit is performed. The display of a screen (for example, a menu screen) is started, and a second setting screen (for example, a volume adjustment setting screen or a light amount adjustment setting screen) when there is a second operation while this first setting screen is displayed The display of may be started.

Further, the layout of the display unit in the setting screen is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (1), the title unit TP, the input unit IP, and the selection unit SP The title part TP, the input part IP, and the selection part SP may be arranged at substantially equal intervals in the horizontal direction, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the size of the display area of each display unit is not particularly limited.
<General production effect>

  Next, referring to FIG. 15 (b), the basic concept of "general drawing effect" that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. In addition, FIG.15 (b) is the figure which showed an example of the structure of a common drawing effect.

  The common drawing effect according to the present embodiment is a production including at least effects by display using the display device, and entering the common drawing start port 228 or starting the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210. Or, it is an effect (effect related to a common drawing) that is executed triggered by a pre-reading or the like of the success or failure judgment of the common drawing fluctuation game. As such a popular drawing effect, other than the effect by display, for example, an effect by the sound output from the sound output means (for example, the speaker 120), an effect by the light output from the light output means (for example, the lamp), One or more or all of the effects such as effects by the movement of the movable body (for example, the effect movable body 224) may be mentioned as an example.

  In addition, although the aspect of the popular drawing effect is not particularly limited, for example, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), the common drawing introduction effect (first effect) NP1 expressing whether or not the common drawing main effect is to be executed. And, General drawing this effect (the second effect) NP2 which suggests or clearly indicates the judgment result of common drawing fluctuation game success or failure, and the second special drawing start opening 232 (electric chew) when the judgment result of general drawing is success. The first to third effects may be executed in this order by a plurality of effects including at least a general drawing result effect (third effect) NP3 for performing the display related to. In addition, as a popular drawing result presentation (third presentation) NP3, for example, a presentation that suggests or clearly indicates that the second special drawing starting port 232 is opened in advance, or the second special drawing starting port 232 is open An indication that indicates or indicates that the condition is

  In addition, a relationship may be given between the popular drawing effect and the special figure fluctuation game, for example, a special effect may be executed in the special figure 2 changing game after the general drawing effect is executed, the special figure fluctuation Even during the special game 2 variation game by winning a prize to the second special view starting port 232 (electric chew) during the period other than the game (for example, while the setting screen is displayed), it is configured not to execute special effects Good. In addition, during the period other than the special figure fluctuation game, you may execute only the effect by the display included in the common figure effect, and during the period other than the special figure fluctuation game, only the ordinary drawing result effect NP3 of the previous example. It may be executed.

  Also, there are a plurality of types of hits for the common drawing fluctuation game, and one of the plurality of types of hits is the first hit (for example, a hit for opening the second special figure start port 232 only for the first period), and a plurality If one of the types of hits is the second hit (for example, the second special figure start port 232 is opened for a second period longer than the first period), the success or failure of the common drawing change game The execution frequency of the common drawing effect in the case where the determination result is the second hit may be higher than in the case where the success or failure determination result of the common pattern fluctuation game is the first hit. In addition, other effects such as advance notice of special game and the like and advance reading effect may be executed in the display area for executing the common game effect. In this case, the volume of the image data may be reduced by using at least a part (for example, a character image) of an image used for another effect in a general effect.

In addition, when the general drawing effect is performed using the display and the sound, the display and the sound may be started at the same time, or after the start of the display, the output of the sound may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed. After the start of the output of, the display may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed.
<Display mode of setting screen and popular drawing effect>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 15C to 15E, the setting screen according to the present embodiment and the display mode of the common drawing effect will be described. In addition, FIG.15 (c)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of a setting screen and a common drawing effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15 (c) (1), at least a part of the rectangular setting screen STP2 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the common drawing effect NP so that at least a part of the common drawing effect NP is covered. By displaying at least a part of the common drawing effect NP on at least a part of the setting screen STP2 and displaying at least a part of the setting screen STP2 invisible from the front (or It is difficult to see compared to the case where the regular drawing effect NP is not executed).

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 15C and 15C, at least a part of the rectangular setting screen STP2 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by at least a part of the common drawing effect NP. The point for displaying the effect NP is the same as the example shown in FIG. 5C (1), but in this example, a part of the common drawing effect NP (a part covering the setting screen STP2) is transmitted. , At least a part of the setting screen STP2 is visible from the front.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (d) (1), the setting screen STP1 (the title part TP, the input part IP, and the selection part SP arranged on the decoration symbol display device 208 in the vertical direction at By displaying the common drawing effect NP such that at least a part of the common drawing effect NP covers at least a part (in this example, the title part TP and a part of the input part IP) of the configured setting screen) At least a part of the setting screen STP1 by overlapping at least a part of the common-play effect NP and displaying at least a part of the setting screen STP2 (in this example, a part of the title part TP and the input part IP) However, it is not visible from the front (or, it is difficult to see compared to the case where the regular drawing effect NP is not executed).

  The setting screen STP1 shown in FIG. 15 (d) (1) is shown in FIG. 15 (d) (2), triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, detection of the operation by the operating means). You may change to setting screen STP2. If such display control is performed, it is possible to change the display area of the setting screen which is covered and concealed by the common drawing effect NP, and in some cases, it is possible to give a variation to the display.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (e), after performing the same display as the example shown in FIG. After the display area of the display area becomes visible from the front, again by displaying the spread map effect NP so that at least a part of the spread screen effect NP covers at least a part of the setting screen STP2 (setting screen STP2 At least a part of the generic drawing effect NP is overlapped and displayed), at least a part of the setting screen STP2 can not be viewed from the front (or the generic drawing effect NP is not executed) It is difficult to see compared to the case). If such display control is performed, it is possible to change the display area of the setting screen which is covered and concealed by the common drawing effect NP, and in some cases, it is possible to give a variation to the display.
<Summary of display screen and display timing of popular drawing effect>

  Next, the outline of the setting screen and the display timing of the common drawing effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 (a) is a time chart showing the flow of a normal drawing effect.

  In addition, the line corresponding to "general drawing fluctuation" (or "special drawing fluctuation") in the subsequent drawings shows whether common drawing fluctuation game (or special drawing fluctuation game) is being executed or not. In the present example, the state of the general drawing fluctuation game being executed (or the special drawing fluctuation game being executed) is indicated by a high level line (upper line), and the general drawing fluctuation game is not being executed (or the special drawing The state of the fluctuation game non-execution) is shown by the line of the low level (the lower line). In addition, the line corresponding to the "general drawing effect" in the subsequent drawings indicates whether or not the general drawing effect is being executed, and in this example, the state in which the general drawing effect is being executed is at a high level. It is indicated by a line, and a state in which the general drawing effect is not executed is indicated by a low level line.

  In addition, the line corresponding to “electric chew open” in the following drawings indicates whether or not the second special view starting port 232 (electric chew) is open, and in the present example, the electric chew open The middle state is indicated by a high level line, and the power-on state is indicated by a low level line. In addition, the pattern of opening / closing of electric chow is not particularly limited. For example, opening of the first time and closing of the first time may be performed only once or plural times, and the second time may be performed. And closing the third time (or the fourth time shorter than the second time) longer than the second time may be performed only once or a plurality of times.

  Further, a line corresponding to “sound output” in the following drawings indicates whether or not the sound is being output from the sound output means (speaker 120), and in the present example, the sound is output. The state is indicated by a high level line, and the state not outputting sound is indicated by a low level line.

  For example, in Fig. 16 (a), the common drawing fluctuation game indicated by reference numeral a1 does not execute the common drawing effect during execution of the common drawing fluctuation game, and in Fig. 16 (a), the common drawing fluctuation game indicated by reference numeral a2 After starting the execution of the common drawing effect at the same time as the start of the common drawing change game, the common drawing effect is ended before the end of the common drawing change game. Also, in the common drawing fluctuation game indicated by the symbol a3 in FIG. 6A, after starting the execution of the common drawing effect at the same time as the start of the common drawing fluctuation game, the common drawing effect is ended simultaneously with the end of the common drawing fluctuation game In the ordinary drawing fluctuating game shown by symbol a4 in (a) of the figure, after starting the execution of the figurative drawing effect simultaneously with the start of the figurative drawing fluctuation game, the figurative drawing end is ended simultaneously with the end of the figurative fluctuation game, After that, the electric chew is opened once. Also, in the common drawing fluctuating game shown by symbol a5 in the figure (a), after the execution of the common drawing fluttering effect is started simultaneously with the start of the common drawing fluctuating game, the common drawing fluttering effect is continued even after the end At the same time as the closing of the electric chow, it has ended the popular drawing production.

  FIG. 16 (b) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the sound output from the sound output means, the special figure variation game, the common drawing effect, and the setting screen. In the special figure fluctuation game indicated by symbol b1 in FIG. 16A, the sound is being output over the entire period from the start to the end of the special figure fluctuation game. In addition, in the special figure fluctuation game shown with the mark b2 in the same figure (a), it is a state which is outputting the sound over the whole period from the start to the end of the special figure fluctuation game, the special figure fluctuation game The display of the setting screen is started after the lapse of a predetermined time after the end.

  Further, in the special figure fluctuation game indicated by reference numeral b3 in FIG. 6A, after the predetermined time after the special figure fluctuation game is over, the display of the setting screen is started and the state shifts to the state where the sound is not output. After that, it has shifted to the state of outputting a sound at the same time as the start of the popular drawing effect. In addition, the execution frequency of the common drawing effect in the setting screen display and the execution frequency of the common drawing effect other than in the setting screen display may be made different, for example, the execution frequency of the latter is made higher than the execution frequency of the former. You may or may not lower it.

FIG. 16C is a time chart showing an example of the special figure variation game, the common figure effect, and the flow of the setting screen. In the example shown in FIG. 16C, after the display of the setting screen is started, the regular drawing effect is started, and the display of the setting screen is erased simultaneously with the start of the special drawing fluctuation game during the execution of the general drawing effect. The setting screen is redisplayed after a predetermined time has passed after the special figure change game.
<Details of setting screen and display timing of popular drawing effect>

  Next, details of the setting screen and the display timing of the common drawing effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a time chart showing an example of the general drawing effect and the flow of the setting screen.

  Note that the line corresponding to the “general drawing gate passage” in the following drawings indicates the timing at which the ball passes through the common drawing starting port 228, and in this example, the timing of the passage is indicated by a thick vertical line. There is. Further, a line corresponding to "setting screen display start operation" in the following drawings indicates the timing at which the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is detected, and in this example, the operation is detected. The bold timing is shown by the thick vertical line.

  At the timing indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 17, the display of the setting screen is started based on the acceptance of the operation of the operation means (chance button 136), and at the subsequent timing indicated by the symbol T2, the setting screen is displayed. Based on the fact that the ball has passed through the figure starting opening 220, the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing effect are started.

  In addition, at the timing indicated by the code T3, based on the passage of the ball through the common drawing start port 220 during the period when the setting screen is not displayed, the common drawing variation game and the common drawing effect are started. At the timing indicated by, the display of the setting screen is started based on the fact that the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) is accepted during execution of the common drawing variation game and the common drawing effect.

In addition, at the timing shown by the code T5, the display of the setting screen is started based on the reception of the operation of the operation means (chance button 136), and at the timing shown by the following code T6, Based on the fact that the ball has passed through the starting opening 220, the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing effect are started. Further, the display of the setting screen is ended at the timing shown by the following code T7, and the display of the setting screen is started based on the fact that the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) is accepted again at the timing shown by the following code T8. doing.
<Specific example of setting screen>

Next, a specific example of the setting screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a specific example of the setting screen.
<Specific example 1 of setting screen>

  18 (a-1) to 18 (a-3) are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the transition of the setting screen. In this example, as shown in the figure (a-1), the "button effect" is based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (for example, that the number of reserved special game variations is 0). I do. Here, the button effect is an effect that indicates or indicates that it is possible to receive an operation by a predetermined operation means. In this example, as the button effect, an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and the display of the characters “Display on menu screen” are displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the chance button 136 is displayed. It indicates that the operation can be accepted.

  Further, in the present example, when the operation by the operation means (chance button 136) is received during execution of the button effect, the first setting screen (menu screen) STP1 as shown in FIG. When the operation by the operation means (chance button 136) is accepted on the first setting screen (menu screen), a second setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 as shown in FIG. indicate.

  Although the display content by the first setting screen (menu screen) STP1 is not particularly limited, in this example, as shown in FIG. 18 (a-2), the character “menu screen” is added as the title part TP described above. The selection button SPa1 is used to shift to an adjustment screen for performing the volume adjustment of the sound output from the speaker 120 and the light amount adjustment of the light emitted from the lamp as the above-described selection unit SP while displaying the title bar TPa1 In the example, an image to which the characters “volume light amount adjustment” have been applied) and a selection button SPa2 for shifting to a member registration screen for performing member registration (in the present embodiment, an image to which the characters “member registration” have been applied) A selection button SPa3 (in the present example, an image to which the characters “gaming history” have been applied) to shift to a browsing screen where the past gaming history in the gaming stand can be browsed, and an operation hand Description part MP1 representing the operation description, respectively, are displayed first setting screen (menu screen) STP1.

Also, the display content by the second setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 is not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. 18 (a-3), the character “adjustment screen” is used as the title part TP described above. To display the title bar TPa2 subjected to the control and to perform the volume level display SPa4 for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 as the above-mentioned selection unit SP, and the light amount adjustment of the light emitted from the lamp The light amount level display SPa5 and the explanation portion MP2 representing the operation explanation of the operation means are displayed on the second setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2.
<Specific example 2 of setting screen>

FIG. 18B is a view showing a second specific example of the setting screen. In this example, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (for example, that an operation for logging in to a member setting screen that only members can view or set is accepted), as shown in FIG. The setting screen (password input screen) STP3 as shown is displayed. Although the display content by this setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not particularly limited, in this example, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), a password is input as the title part TP in the setting screen STP3. Title bar TPb1 to which the character "please" is applied is displayed, and character selection part SP1 which can select a character by operation with an operation means (for example, determination button, right button, left button) as the above-mentioned selection part SP As the above-described input unit IP, the character selection unit SP is used to display a password input field IP1 capable of inputting a password one by one.
<Specific example 3 of setting screen>

FIG. 18C is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of the setting screen. In this example, a setting screen (character selection screen) STP4 as shown in FIG. 6C is selected based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (for example, winning a big hit in a special figure change game). indicate. Although the display content by this setting screen (character selection screen) STP4 is not particularly limited, in this example, as shown in FIG. 18C, the character “favorite selection screen” is given as the title part TP described above. The title bar TPc1 is displayed, and a selection button SPc1 for selecting the character A, a selection button SPc2 for selecting the character B, and a selection button SPc3 for selecting the character C as the selection portion SP described above. Are respectively displayed on the setting screen (character selection screen) STP4.
<Specific example 4 of setting screen>

FIG. 18D is a view showing a specific example 4 of the setting screen. In this example, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, the condition that gives the player a predetermined benefit is satisfied), a setting screen as shown in FIG. Screen) Display STP5. Although the display content by this setting screen (code issuance screen) STP5 is not particularly limited, in this example, the title bar TPd1 on which the character "code issuance screen" is displayed is displayed as the title part TP described above. Codes (bar code, QR code (registered trademark), etc.) are displayed on the setting screen STP5.
<Example 5 of setting screen>

FIG. 18E is a view showing a specific example 5 of the setting screen. In this example, based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established during the game (for example, the function of customizing the game by logging in to the member screen that only members can view) is selected (e) (e) The setting screen (customization screen) STP6 as shown in) is displayed. The display content by this setting screen (customization screen) STP6 is not particularly limited, but in this example, the title bar TPe1 on which the characters "customization screen" are displayed is displayed as the above-mentioned title portion TP and the above selection As part SP, selection button SPe1 for selecting function 1, selection button SPe2 for selecting function 2, and selection button SPe3 for selecting function 3 (other selection buttons are omitted), respectively It is displayed on the setting screen (character selection screen) STP6.
<Other specific examples of setting screen>

  Note that the setting screen according to the present embodiment is not limited to the setting screens described in Specific Examples 1 to 5, and, for example, in Specific Example 1 described using FIGS. 18 (a-1) to (a-3). 18 (f-1) does not display the first setting screen (menu screen) STP1 when the operation by the operation means (chance button 136) is received during execution of the button effect shown in FIG. 18 (f-1). A second setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 as shown in (f-2) may be displayed. Further, the second setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 as shown in FIG. 6G is configured to be displayed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game without performing the button effect. It is also good.

Further, in the third specific example described with reference to FIG. 18 (c), based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (for example, winning a big hit in the special figure variation game), FIG. The setting screen (music selection screen) STP7 as shown in) may be displayed. In the setting screen (song selection screen) STP7, a selection button SPh1 for selecting the music A, a selection button SPh2 for selecting the music B, and a selection for selecting the music C as the above-described selection unit SP The button SPh3 is displayed on the setting screen (song selection screen) STP7.
<A specific example of popular drawing effect>

Next, a specific example of the common drawing effect will be described. FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are diagrams showing an example of the common drawing effect in time series. In addition, each image is an excerpted part of a series of common drawing effects and shown, and the display interval of each image is not necessarily constant.
<Specific example 1 of popular drawing effect>

  The state shown in FIG. 19A is a state before the start of the change game. Here, it is notified that the number of reservations of the special figure 1 change game is 1 by turning on one first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 is turned off altogether. In FIG. 2, it is reported that the number of pending game of fluctuation game is 0, and all the common drawing holding lamps 216 are turned off, thereby giving notification that the number of pending game of common drawing fluctuation game is 0.

  In addition, by lighting the segment of the first special view display device 212 in the lighting mode corresponding to the lost symbol, it is informed that the result of the success or failure determination of the special figure 1 fluctuation game immediately before was the lost symbol, and the second By lighting the segments of the special view display device 214 in the lighting mode corresponding to the lost symbol, it is informed that the result of the success or failure determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation game immediately before is the lost symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 The special drawing fourth symbol 208e (in this example, a colorless circle image in this case) is displayed at the upper right corner of the special drawing to indicate that the special drawing fluctuation is being stopped. .

  Further, by lighting the segments of the common drawing display device 210 in the lighting mode corresponding to the lost symbol, it is informed that the result of the success / failure determination of the last common drawing fluctuation game is the lost symbol, and the decorative symbol display device By displaying the fourth symbol for common drawing 208f (in this example, a colorless square image in this example) indicating that the common drawing fluctuation is stopped at the upper right corner of 208, it is informed that the common drawing fluctuation is stopped. .

  The state shown in the following FIG. 19 (b) is the state immediately after the start of the variation game of the special figure. Here, by repeating the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the first special view display device 212, the "variation display of the special view 1" is started and the decoration is performed. In each of the three display areas in the upper left corner of the symbol display device 208, "decorate 1" → "decorate 2" → "decorate 3" → ... "decorate 9" → "decorate 10" → "decorate 1" → By displaying ... in order, "variation display of the decoration pattern" is started. In addition, by displaying the special drawing fourth symbol 208e (in the present example, an image of a colored circle) indicating that the special drawing is changing, it is informed that the special drawing is changing. In addition, by turning off the first special view reserve lamp 218, it is informed that the number of reserve for special figure 1 floating game has decreased from 1 to 0, and by turning on the common view reserve lamp 216, It has been notified that the number of pending game of common drawing fluctuation game has increased from 0 to 1.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 19C is the state immediately after the start of the fluctuation game of the common drawing. Here, “the fluctuation display of the common drawing” is started by repeating the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the common drawing display device 210. Further, by displaying the fourth symbol for common drawing 208f (in this example, a colored square image in this example) indicating that the common drawing is being changed, it is informed that the common drawing is being changed. Also, by turning off the common drawing holding lamp 216, it is notified that the number of holdings of the common drawing fluctuation game has decreased from 1 to 0.

  The following state shown in FIG. 19 (d) is a state in which the common drawing effect is started based on the start of the common drawing fluctuation game at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (c). Here, display of the character image NP11 of the statue, display of the balloon NP12 including the character “Aim !!”, and display of the target image NP13 are performed as the target drawing effect, and the target image NP13 is changed to the target image NP13. A downward arrow (↓) indicating that it is inside is displayed.

  The state shown in the following FIGS. 19E to 19F is a state in which the continuation of the regular drawing effect is being executed. Here, as a continuation of the regular drawing effect, after erasing the display of the balloon NP12, an arrow image NP14 displays an animation in which the character image NP11 of the statue moves from the character image NP11 toward the target image NP13. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 19 (f), the image NP14 of the arrow is brought into contact with the image NP13 of the target, and the image NP13 of the target suggests the result (in this example, the loss) Display (in this example, the mark x) is displayed.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 19 (g) is a state in which the regular drawing effect is ended along with the end of the fluctuation game of the regular drawing. Here, by lighting the segment of the common drawing display device 210 in the lighting mode corresponding to the lost symbol, it is informed that the result of the success / failure determination of the last common drawing fluctuation game was a loss, and the decorative symbol display apparatus By displaying the fourth symbol for common drawing 208f (in this example, a colorless square image in this example) indicating that the common drawing fluctuation is stopped at the upper right corner of 208, it is informed that the common drawing fluctuation is stopped. . In addition, in this example, since the result of the success or failure determination of a common drawing fluctuation game is a loss, control which opens the blade member 232a of the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 (electric chew) is not performed.

  19 (j) to FIG. 19 (l) are diagrams showing, in time series, an example of the common drawing effect to be performed when the result of the success or failure judgment of the common drawing fluctuation game is a hit. For example, in the case where the result of the success or failure judgment of the common drawing fluctuation game started in the above FIG. 19 (c) is a hit, the common communication shown in FIG. 19 (j) to FIG. Perform the figure effect.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (j), the image NP14 of the arrow is brought into contact with the image NP13 of the target, and in the image NP13 of the target The indication (in this example, the double circle) which suggests) is displayed.

In addition, at timing shown in FIG. 19 (k) that follows, display of balloon display NP 12 ′ including the letters “Congratulations !!” is performed, and at timing shown in following FIG. 19 (l), second special figure starting port 232 Operation-related display that urges the player to hit the ball in order to enter the ball (in this example, (in this example, the display of the characters “Aim for the electric chew!” And the two arrows pointing downward表示 表示) is displayed. Subsequently, in the present example, since the result of the success or failure determination of the common drawing variation game is a hit, control is performed to open the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 (electric chew).
<Specific example 2 of popular drawing effect>

  The state shown in FIG. 20 (a) is a state in which the special figure fluctuates. Here, "the variation display of the special figure 1" is performed in the first special view display device 212, and the "the variation display of the decoration pattern" is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the special symbol fourth symbol 208e (in the present example, an image of a colored circle) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that the special symbol is in the changing condition. By displaying the fourth symbol for common drawing 208 f (in this example, a colorless square image in this example) representing that the common drawing fluctuation is stopped on the decorative symbol display device 208, it is informed that the common drawing fluctuation is stopped. .

  In addition, by turning on two first special view holding lamps 218, it notifies that the number of special drawing 1 floating game reservations is 2, and by turning off all the second special drawing holding lamps 220, the special drawing 2 Informing that the number of pending variable game is 0, and turning on two regular drawing holding lamps 216, it is informing that the number of pending general game variation is 2.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 20 (b) is the state immediately after the start of the fluctuation game of the common drawing. Here, "the fluctuation display of the common drawing" is started in the common drawing display device 210, and the common drawing fourth symbol 208f (in this example, a colored square image in this example) is displayed on the decorative symbol display apparatus. By displaying at 208, it is informed that the general drawing is changing. Further, by turning off the common drawing holding lamp 216, it is notified that the number of holdings of the common drawing fluctuation game has decreased from 2 to 1.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 20 (c) is a state in which the common drawing effect is started based on the start of the common drawing fluctuation game at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (b). Here, display of the character image NP11 of the statue, display of the balloon NP12 including the character “Aim !!”, and display of the target image NP13 are performed as the target drawing effect, and the target image NP13 is changed to the target image NP13. A downward arrow (↓) indicating that it is inside is displayed.

  The state shown in the following FIGS. 20D to 20E is a state in which the continuation of the common drawing effect is executed. Here, as a continuation of the regular drawing effect, after erasing the display of the balloon NP12, an arrow image NP14 displays an animation in which the character image NP11 of the statue moves from the character image NP11 toward the target image NP13. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 20 (e), the arrow image NP14 contacts the target image NP13, and the target image NP13 shows the result of the success / failure determination of the special figure fluctuation game during fluctuation (in this example, the big hit The display (in this example, the letters "super heat") is displayed.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 20 (f) is a state in which the regular drawing effect is ended along with the end of the fluctuation game of the regular drawing. Here, by lighting the segment of the common drawing display device 210 in the lighting mode corresponding to the lost symbol, it is informed that the result of the success / failure determination of the last common drawing fluctuation game was a loss, and the decorative symbol display apparatus By displaying the fourth symbol for common drawing 208f (in this example, a colorless square image in this example) indicating that the common drawing fluctuation is stopped at the upper right corner of 208, it is informed that the common drawing fluctuation is stopped. . In this example, since the result of the success or failure judgment of the common drawing fluctuation game is a loss, the control to open the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 (electric chew) is not performed.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 20 (g) is the state where the super reach (SP) effect in the special figure change is started. The SP reach effect is one of the effects that indicate the result (in this example, a big hit) of the special game variation game success / failure determination.

In addition, the display mode of the "general drawing effect" which concerns on this invention is not specifically limited, As shown to FIG. 20 (j)-the figure (l), the arbitrary period in the common drawing change game ( Only the display NP 13 of the target image may be performed in all periods (or in part of the period) of the common pattern variation game.
<Specific example of popular drawing effect on the setting screen>

Next, a specific example of the common drawing effect while the setting screen is displayed will be described. 21 to 24 are diagrams showing, in time series, a specific example of the common drawing effect in the setting screen display.
<Specific example 1 of a popular drawing effect displayed on the setting screen>

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing, in a time series, a specific example 1 of the common drawing effect in the setting screen display. The state shown in FIG. 21 (a) is a state in which the special figure fluctuates. Here, "the variation display of the special figure 1" is performed in the first special view display device 212, and the "the variation display of the decoration pattern" is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the special symbol fourth symbol 208e (in the present example, an image of a colored circle) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that the special symbol is in the changing condition. By displaying the fourth symbol for common drawing 208 f (in this example, a colorless square image in this example) representing that the common drawing fluctuation is stopped on the decorative symbol display device 208, it is informed that the common drawing fluctuation is stopped. .

  In addition, by turning off all the first special view holding lamps 218, it notifies that the number of special drawing 1 floating game reservations is 0, and by turning off all the second special drawing holding lamps 220, the special drawing 2 By notifying that the number of pending variable game is 0 and turning on two common drawing holding lamps 216, it is notified that the number of pending general game fluctuation game is 2.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 21 (b) is the state immediately after the start of the fluctuation game of the common figure. Here, "the fluctuation display of the common drawing" is started in the common drawing display device 210, and the common drawing fourth symbol 208f (in this example, a colored square image in this example) is displayed on the decorative symbol display apparatus. By displaying at 208, it is informed that the general drawing is changing. Further, by turning off the common drawing holding lamp 216, it is notified that the number of holdings of the common drawing fluctuation game has decreased from 2 to 1.

  In the state shown in FIG. 21 (c) that follows, "button effect" is performed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (in this example, the number of pending special game variation games has become 0). It is in the state of Here, based on the fact that the operation by the operation means (chance button 136) is received during execution of the button effect, the setting screen (menu screen) STP1 shown in FIG. 21C is displayed, and this setting screen (menu screen 21. A setting screen (password input screen) STP3 shown in FIG. 21D is displayed based on the reception of the operation by the operation means (chance button 136) in STP1.

  The following state shown in FIG. 21 (e) is a state in which the common drawing effect is started based on the start of the common drawing fluctuation game at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (b). Here, display of the character image NP11 of the statue, display of the balloon NP12 including the character “Aim !!”, and display of the target image NP13 are performed as the target drawing effect, and the target image NP13 is changed to the target image NP13. A downward arrow (↓) indicating that it is inside is displayed.

  At this timing, a part of the display of the title bar TPb1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is covered with a part of the display of the speech balloon NP12 constituting the common drawing effect (the display of the speech balloon NP12 is , And a part of the display of the title bar TPb1 is not visible (or the display of the balloon NP12 is not displayed) by overlapping the display so as to partially overlap the display of the title bar TPb1). Difficult to see).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the display of the password input field IP1 and the character selection unit SP1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not covered by the display of the balloon NP12 (the display of the balloon NP12 is a password All of the display of the password input box IP1 and the character selection unit SP1 can be visually recognized because the overlap display is not performed so as to overlap with a part of the display of the input box IP1 and the character selection unit SP1).

  The state shown in the following FIGS. 21 (f) to (g) is a state in which the continuation of the common drawing effect is executed. Here, as a continuation of the regular drawing effect, after the display of the balloon NP12 is erased, the display of the arrow image NP14 displays an animation in which the character image NP11 of the statue moves toward the target image NP13. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (g), the arrow image NP14 contacts the target image NP13, and the target image NP13 suggests the result (in this example, a loss) of the propriety determination of the common drawing fluctuation game. Display (in this example, the mark x) is displayed.

  During the period shown in (f) to (g) of FIG. 21, a part of the password input field IP1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 constitutes display of the arrow image NP14 constituting the common drawing effect. Part of the display of the password input field IP1 is displayed by being covered with a part of (the display of the arrow image NP14 is overlapped so as to overlap with the part of the display of the password input field IP1) , Or invisible (or visually difficult as compared to the case where the display of the arrow image NP 14 is not displayed).

  On the other hand, during the synchronization period, the display of the title bar TPb1 and the character selection unit SP1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not obscured by the display of the arrow image NP14 (arrow image NP14 The display is not overlapped so as to overlap with the title bar TPb1 or a part of the display of the character selection unit SP1), and all of the display of the title bar TPb1 and the character selection unit SP1 are visible.

The state shown in the following FIG. 21 (h) is a state in which the spread-pattern effect is ended along with the end of the fluctuation game of the spread-pattern. Here, since all the displays constituting the common drawing effect are erased along with the end of the common drawing effect, the display (title bar TPb1, password input field IP1, and characters constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 All of the display of the selection unit SP1 is visible.
<Specific example 2 of a popular drawing effect displayed on the setting screen>

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing, in a time series, a second specific example of the common drawing effect during setting screen display. 22 (a) to 22 (f) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (f), and therefore the description thereof is omitted. (G) Each of the following figures will be described.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (g), the target image NP13 displays a display (in this example, a double circle in this example) indicating the result (in this example, a hit) of the success / failure determination of the common drawing fluctuation game. . Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (h), the display of the balloon NP12 ′ including the characters “Congratulations !!” is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (i), the second special view starting opening 232 Operation-related display NP15 prompting the player to strike a ball by aiming at entering the ball (electric chew) (in this example, the display of the characters “Aim for the electric chew !!” and the two downward arrows (表示 表示) is displayed. Subsequently, in the present example, since the result of the success or failure determination of the common drawing variation game is a hit, control is performed to open the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 (electric chew).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (h), a part of the display of the title bar TPb1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is obscured by a part of the display of the balloon NP12 ′ constituting the common drawing effect (In that the display of the balloon NP12 'is overlapped so as to overlap with the display of the title bar TPb1), a part of the display of the title bar TPb1 is not visible (or the display of the balloon NP12' Is difficult to see compared to the case where is not displayed).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the display of the password input field IP1 and the character selection unit SP1 that make up the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not covered by the display of the balloon NP12 '(the display of the balloon NP12' is Because the password input field IP1 and the character selection part SP1 are not overlapped so as to overlap with a part of the display), all of the displays of the password input field IP1 and the character selection part SP1 are visible.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (i), a part of the character selection part SP1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is covered and concealed by a part of the operation related display NP15 constituting the common drawing effect. (The operation related display NP15 is overlapped and displayed so as to overlap with a part of the display of the character selection part SP1), and a part of the display of the selection part SP1 is not visible (or the operation related display NP15 is It is difficult to see compared to the case where it is not displayed.

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the display of the title bar TPb1 and the password input field IP1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not covered with the operation related display NP15 (the operation related display NP15 is a title bar All the display of the title bar TPb1 and the password input box IP1 can be visually recognized because the overlap is not displayed so as to overlap with a part of the display of the TPb1 and the password input box IP1).

In the subsequent FIGS. 22 (j) to (k), the exclusive effect to be executed only at the time of the control is performed according to the control for opening the blade member 232a of the second special view starting port 232 (electric chew). . Note that this dedicated effect is not a mandatory effect and may not be performed.
<Specific example 3 of a popular drawing effect displayed on the setting screen>

  FIG. 23: (a)-(g) is the figure which showed the specific example 3 of the common drawing effect in setting screen display in time series. Note that the respective drawings shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to (f) are the same as the respective drawings shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to (f), and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. (G) Each of the following figures will be described.

  In (g) of FIG. 23, while the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 shown in (f) of FIG. It is in the state where the special view fluctuation display has been started. Here, at the start of the special view variation display, all the displays (title bar TPb1, password input field IP1, and display of the character selection portion SP1) constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 are erased and the decoration pattern is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol by the display device 208 is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (g), a part of the decorative symbol in the variation (in this example, the decorative symbol on the left side in front view) covers the part of the image display NP14 of the arrow that constitutes the popular drawing effect. One of the decorative symbols (the decorative symbol on the left on the front view) by being hidden (by overlapping the display of the image NP14 of the arrow so as to overlap with the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol on the left on the front)) The part is not visible (or not visible as compared with the case where the display of the arrow image NP 14 is not displayed).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the other part of the decorative design in motion (in this example, the decorative design on the front right side and the front central view) is not obscured by the display of the arrow image NP14 (arrow The display of the image NP14 is because the display is not overlapping so as to overlap with the other part of the moving decorative pattern (the front right side and the front center central decorative pattern), the changing decorative pattern (front side right and All the other part of the decorative pattern in the center of the front view is visible.

In addition, the decorative design concealed by the display constituting the common drawing effect is not limited to the decorative design on the front view left side, may be a decorative pattern on the front view right side or the front view center, and among these plural decorative patterns It may be one, several or all. The decorative symbol concealed by the display constituting the common drawing effect is not limited to the decorative symbol in the variable display, and one, plural or all of the plural decorative symbols may be stopped. Further, the display for hiding the decorative symbol may be one, a plurality of, or all of a plurality of displays constituting the common drawing effect, and may be a display other than the display of the arrow image NP14.
<Specific example 4 of a popular drawing effect displayed on the setting screen>

  FIG. 23: (j)-(l) is the figure which showed the specific example 4 of the common drawing effect in setting screen display in time series. In the state shown in FIG. 23 (j), power saving is performed based on that a predetermined condition is established (for example, a predetermined time has passed with the number of reservations for special figure fluctuation game being 0 after the special figure fluctuation game is over). It is in the state of transition to the mode. In this power saving mode, the background color of the display area of the decorative symbol variation display device 208 is changed to black, and only the character display of "power saving mode" is performed to save the power consumed by the decorative symbol display device 208. I have to.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (k), the regular drawing variation game is started in the power saving mode, and at the timing shown in the following FIG. 23 (l), the power saving mode is released based on having started the regular drawing variation game. While returning the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the display before shifting to the power saving mode, the regular drawing effect is started.

  In this example, the stop display of the decorative symbol and the button effect are displayed as the display before shifting to the power saving mode, and the display of the character image NP11 of the statue as the popular drawing effect after canceling the power saving mode, The display of the balloon NP12 including the characters “!!” and the display of the target image NP13 are performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l), a part of the decorative symbol (in this example, the decorative symbol on the front view right side and the center in the front view center) and a part of the button effect constitute a popular effect at the stop display. Covered with a part of the display of the balloon NP12 (The display of the balloon NP12 is overlapped with a part of the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern on the right side of the front view and the center of the front view) and a part of the button effect ), A part of the decorative pattern (a decorative pattern on the front view right side and the center of the front view) and a part of the button effect are not visible (or not visible as compared with the case where the display of the balloon NP12 is not displayed) ).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the other part of the decorative symbol in change (in this example, the decorative symbol on the left side in front view) is not covered by the display of the balloon NP12 (the display of the balloon NP12 is variable All the other part of the decorative design (the decorative design on the front view on the left) is visible because the display does not overlap to overlap the other part of the inside (the design on the left on the front view) It is possible.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (m), the setting screen (menu screen) STP1 is displayed based on the reception of the operation by the operation means (chance button 136) during execution of the button effect.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (m), the display of character image NP11 and the display of balloon NP12, in which a part of the selection unit SP constituting the setting screen (menu screen) STP1 constitutes a popular drawing effect, Covering with a part of the display of the image NP13 (the display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, and the display of the target image NP13 are overlapped so as to overlap with a part of the selection unit SP) Part of the selection part SP becomes invisible (or difficult to view compared to the case where the display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, and the display of the target image NP13 are not displayed). ing.

On the other hand, at the same timing, the title part TP and the explanation part MP constituting the setting screen (menu screen) STP1 may be obscured by the display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12 and the display of the target image NP13. (The display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, and the display of the target image NP13 are not overlapped so as to overlap with the title part TP and the explanation part MP). Everything is visible.
<Specific example 5 of a popular drawing effect displayed on the setting screen>

  (A) to (d) of FIG. 24 are diagrams showing, in chronological order, a fifth specific example of the common drawing effect during setting screen display. In the state shown in FIG. 24 (a), the "button effect" is performed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (in this example, the number of reserved special game variation games has become 0). It is a state. Moreover, in this example, the first special view hold display area 208h1 representing the number of special view change game reservations in numbers and the number of icons for displaying the special view change game support number in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 The 2nd special figure reservation display area 208h2 represented by is provided. In this example, while the number 0 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208h1 and the hold icon is not displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208h2, the number of holdings of the special view fluctuation game is 0. It reports that there is.

  In the state shown in FIG. 24B, the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is displayed based on the fact that the operation by the operation means (chance button 136) is received while the button effect shown in FIG. It is in the state of display.

  At the same timing, the display of the decorative symbol and the background image in the stop display is covered with the entire setting screen (password input screen) STP3 (the entire setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is in the stop display) By overlapping display so as to partially overlap the display of the decorative pattern and the background image), part of the display of the decorative pattern and the background image during stop display is not visible (or the setting screen (password input screen) ) It is difficult to view compared to the case where STP 3 is not displayed.

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the first special view hold display area 208h1 and the second special view hold display area 208h2 are not covered by the entire setting screen (password input screen) STP3 and therefore the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not overlapped so as to overlap with a part of the first special view reserve display area 208h1 and the second special view reserve display area 208h2), the first special view reserve display area 208h1 and the second special view reserve display area All 208h2 displays are visible.

  For this reason, while the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is being displayed, it is possible to notify the number of holdings of the special figure fluctuation game, and the player may display the setting screen (password input screen) STP3. It becomes possible to grasp the number of pending calls.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 24 (c) is a state in which the common drawing effect is started based on the start of the common drawing fluctuation game. Here, on the back of the setting screen (password input screen) STP3, as a common drawing effect, a display NP11 of the character image of the statue, a display NP12 of a balloon including the characters "Aim !!", a display NP13 of the target image It is carried out.

  However, at the same timing, a part of the display of the character image NP11 of the main character, the entire display of the balloon NP12, and a part of the display of the target image NP13 are covered with the entire setting screen (password input screen) STP3. The setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is overlapped and displayed so as to overlap a part of the display of the character image NP11 of the main character, the entire display of the balloon NP12, and a part of the display of the target image NP13. Therefore, a part of the common drawing effect is not visible (or not visible as compared with the case where the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not displayed).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the first special view reserve display area 208h1 and the second special view reserve display area 208h2 are not obscured by the display configuring the common view effect (the display configuring the common view effect is 1st special view reserve display area 208h1 and 2nd special view reserve display area 208h2 so as not to overlap and overlap) and display of 1st special view reserve display area 208h1 and 2nd special view reserve display area 208h2 All of is visible.

At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (d), the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is erased to display the character image NP11 of the lord, the display of the balloon NP12, the display of the target image NP13, and the arrow. The display of the image NP14 is visible, but a part of the decorative pattern is difficult to view due to the display of the arrow image NP14.
<Specific example 6 of a popular drawing effect displayed on the setting screen>

  (F) and (g) of FIG. 24 are diagrams showing, in chronological order, a sixth specific example of the common drawing effect during setting screen display. The game console according to the present example comprises two display means, a first display device 2081 and a second display device 2082. At the timing shown in FIG. 24F, a part of the setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 (title bar TP, volume level display SP1, and light level display SP2) is displayed on the first display device 2081. An operation unit MP, which is another part of the setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2, is displayed on the second display device 2082.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 24 (g) is a state in which a regular drawing effect is started. At the same timing, a part of the title bar TP and the volume level display SP1 that make up the setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 is the display of the balloon NP12 that makes up the popular drawing effect, the display of the target image NP13, and the image of the arrow NP14. (The display of the balloon NP12, the display of the target image NP13, and the display of the arrow image NP14 overlap the title bar TPb1 or a part of the volume level display SP1) When the title bar TPb1 or a part of the volume level display SP1 is not visible (or the display of the balloon NP12, the display of the target image NP13, and the display of the arrow image NP14 are not displayed) It is difficult to see compared to

On the other hand, at the same timing, the display of the light intensity level display SP2 and the explanation unit MP constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is covered by the display of the balloon NP12, the display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14. Because it is not hidden (the display of the balloon NP12, the display of the target image NP13, and the display of the arrow image NP14 are not overlapped so as to partially overlap the display of the light amount level display SP2 and the explanation unit MP) , Light amount level display SP2 and the display of the explanation unit MP are all visible.
<Specific example 7 of a popular drawing effect displayed on the setting screen>

  (F) and (g ′) of FIG. 24 are diagrams showing, in chronological order, a specific example 7 of the drawing common effect during the setting screen display. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (g ′), a part of the volume level display SP1 constituting the setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 is covered with the display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14. (The display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14 are overlapped so as to overlap with a part of the volume level display SP1), a part of the volume level display SP1 is visually recognized. It is disabled (or less visible than when the display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14 are not displayed).

On the other hand, at the same timing, the display of the title bar TP, the light intensity level display SP2, and the explanation unit MP constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is the display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, and the target image NP13. Because it is not obscured by the display and the display of the arrow image NP14 (the display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, the display of the target image NP13, and the display of the arrow image NP14, the title bar TP, the light amount The title bar TP, the light amount level display SP2, and the display of the explanation part MP can all be viewed visually, because the display of the level display SP2 and the explanation part MP is not overlapped so as to partially overlap the display.
<Specific example 8 of a popular drawing effect displayed on the setting screen>

  FIG. 24 (h) is a diagram showing, in a time series, a specific example 8 of the game drawing effect during setting screen display. The game console according to the present example comprises two display means, a first display device 2081 and a second display device 2083, and the second display device 2083 has a predetermined interval with the first display device 2081. It is incorporated in a part of the operation means 2085 placed and placed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 24H, a part of the volume level display SP1 constituting the setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 is obscured by the display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14. (In that the display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14 are overlapped to overlap with a part of the volume level display SP1), a part of the volume level display SP1 is not visible. (Or, the display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14 are less visible than in the case where the display is not displayed).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the display of the title bar TP, the light intensity level display SP2, and the explanation unit MP constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is the display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, and the target image NP13. Because it is not obscured by the display and the display of the arrow image NP14 (the display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, the display of the target image NP13, and the display of the arrow image NP14, the title bar TP, the light amount The title bar TP, the light amount level display SP2, and the display of the explanation part MP can all be viewed visually, because the display of the level display SP2 and the explanation part MP is not overlapped so as to partially overlap the display.

  As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes the starting area (for example, the second special view starting port 232) and the first display unit (for example, the common view display device 210). , And a second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the first display means can at least execute symbol fluctuation display (for example, common figure fluctuation display) Means, the second display means is means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of displays (for example, setting screen display), and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display. Yes, at least one of the plurality of types of display is the second display, and the start area has the first display means stopped displaying the first symbol form (for example, hit symbol) Later on, at least start running the hit action The hit operation is an operation including at least an operation of opening the start region, and the first display is a display related to effect setting (hereinafter referred to as "setting display"), and The second display is a display related to the hit operation (hereinafter referred to as "effect display"), and the second display means is configured to display the second display during execution of the first display. It is a game console characterized by at least means capable of starting execution.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the display related to the hit operation can be performed even while the display related to the effect setting is performed, the player is disadvantageously given. Such situations can be prevented in advance, and it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by the display means.

  Further, the second display means can execute at least the setting display in the first display area, and the second display means can at least execute the effect display in the second display area. The display area of at least a part of the second display area may be a display area overlapping the display area of at least a part of the first display area.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize both the display related to the effect setting and the display related to the hit operation, thereby giving the player a disadvantage while securing the player's convenience. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent such a situation.

  In addition, the setting display may be a display of a plurality of types (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and (1) and FIG. 15 (a) and (2)) Title part TP showing adjustment, character selection, BGM selection, etc., input part IP for letting the player input input information (for example, password, numbers etc.), selection by operation by operation means (for example, chance button 136) At least one of the plurality of types of display units is a first display unit, and the plurality of types of display units At least one of the display units is a second display unit, and the first display unit is a display unit displayed in a third display area of the first display area; The second display unit is It is a display part displayed on the 4th display area among 1 display areas, and the display area of at least one copy of said 3rd display area is the display area of at least one copy of said 1st display area, and It may be an overlapping display area.

  Further, the effect display is a display configured by at least a plurality of types of effect units, and at least one of the plurality of effect types is a first effect unit, and the effects of the plurality of types of effect units At least one of them is a second effect unit, the first effect unit is an effect to be executed over a first period, and the second effect unit is an instruction for a second period. The second period may be a period different from the first period.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be a symbol variation display of a normal symbol, and the effect display may be an effect display at least associated with the symbol change display.

  Further, the setting display may be a display including at least a display related to the adjustment of the volume of the sound, and a sound output unit (for example, the speaker 120) capable of outputting a sound. The display device may further include light output means (for example, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device) capable of outputting light, and the setting display may be a display including at least a display related to adjustment of the light amount of the light. Furthermore, the setting display may be a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state when in the second state. The second state is a state in which at least a portion of the effect display overlaps at least a portion of the setting display, and in the first state, at least a portion of the effect display is It may be in a state not overlapping at least a part of the setting display.

  In addition, the gaming table is provided with symbol display means and display means, and the symbol display means is means capable of at least executing symbol variation display, and the display means is capable of at least executing plural types of displays. Means, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, the first display Is a setting screen display capable of at least setting for a game, the second display is an effect display at least associated with the symbol variation display, and the second display is for a first period. Among them, at least a display to be executed, the first period may be a period in which the setting screen display is at least executed.

  Further, at least a part of the setting screen display may be a display overlapped by at least a part of the effect display. The setting screen display is a display configured by at least a plurality of types of display units, and at least one of the plurality of types of display units is a first display unit, and the plurality of types of display units At least one of the display units is a second display unit, and at least a part of the first display unit is a display overlapped by at least a part of the effect display, the second display unit May be a display that is not overlapped by at least a part of the effect display.

  In addition, the display effect display is a display configured by at least a plurality of types of effect units, and at least one of the plurality of types of effect units is a first effect unit, and at least one of the plurality of effect units. At least one of them is a second effect unit, the first effect unit is an effect to be executed over a first period, and the second effect unit is an instruction for a second period. The second period is a period different from the first period, and at least a part of the setting screen display is a display overlapped by the first one. The setting screen display may be a display that is not overlapped by the second effect unit.

  The symbol variation display may be a symbol variation display of a normal symbol, and the effect display may be an effect display at least associated with the symbol variation display of the normal symbol. In addition, it is a means that is provided with a success or failure judgment means, the success or failure judgment means can execute at least the success or failure judgment of the variation game of the normal symbol, and the effect display shows that the result of the success or failure judgment is the first success or failure judgment result. In the case where there is an effect display to be executed at a first frequency, the effect display is an effect display to be executed at a second frequency when the result of the success or failure judgment is a second success or failure judgment result. The second success / failure determination result may be a success / failure determination result different from the first success / failure determination result, and the second frequency may be a frequency different from the first frequency.

The display device may further include sound output means capable of outputting a sound, and the effect display may be an effect display including at least an effect by the sound. The display device may further include light output means capable of outputting light, and the effect display may be effect display including at least an effect by the light. Further, the setting screen display may be a display capable of at least adjusting the volume of the sound. Further, the apparatus may include light output means capable of outputting light, and the setting screen display may be display capable of at least adjusting the light amount of the light.
<Non-movable body and movable body>

  Next, the basic concept of the non-movable body and the movable body provided in the game stand according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (a) to FIG. 25 (d) are views showing an example of the movement of the movable body, and FIG. 25 (e) is a view showing a modification of the shape of the movable body.

  The “movable body” included in the game stand of the present embodiment is an object configured to be movable, and, for example, prizes such as the shielding device 246 and the effect movable body 224 correspond. Further, the “non-movable body” included in the gaming table of the present embodiment is an object that is not configured to be movable, and, for example, the outer frame 102 or the like corresponds.

  The state shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (1) is a state in which the movable body CB is moved to the first position. The first position is a position where the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB do not overlap in a front view. The state shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (2) is a state in which the movable body CB is moved to the second position. The second position is a position where at least a portion of the movable body CB and at least a portion of the non-movable body NCB overlap in a front view.

  The movable body CB in this example is at least between the first position shown in FIG. 25 (a) (1) and the second position shown in FIG. It is an object configured to be movable. When the movable body CB is moved to the first position, the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB do not overlap in a front view, so the non-movable body NCB can not be seen by the movable body CB (or the movable body CB) Is difficult to see compared to when moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, in a state where the movable body CB moves to the second position, at least a part of the non-movable body NCB is at least a part of the movable body CB because the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB overlap in front view It becomes invisible (or invisible as compared with the case where the movable body CB is moved to the first position). Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and (2), when the non-movable body NCB is a liquid crystal display device and a rectangular image CG is displayed on this liquid crystal display device, the movable body CB is in the second position. In the moved state, at least a part of the image CG is not visible by at least a part of the movable body CB because the movable body CB and the image CG overlap in a front view (or the movable body CB moves to the first position It becomes difficult to see compared to the case of

  The state shown in FIG. 25 (b) (1) is a state in which the movable body CB is moved to a third position slightly closer to the second position than the first position. The third position is a position where at least a portion of the movable body CB and at least a portion of the non-movable body NCB overlap in a front view. Therefore, in a state where the movable body CB moves to the third position, at least a portion of the non-movable body NCB is at least a portion of the movable body CB because the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB overlap in front view Therefore, it becomes invisible (or, as compared with the case where the movable body CB is moved to the first position, difficult to be recognized).

  However, the size of the area of the non-movable body NCB which becomes invisible (or hard to see) when the movable body CB moves to the third position is visually recognized when the movable body CB moves to the second position It is smaller than the size of the area of the non-movable body NCB which is disabled (or hard to see).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and (2), when the non-movable body NCB is a liquid crystal display device and the rectangular image CG is displayed on this liquid crystal display device, the movable body CB is in the third position. In the moved state, at least a part of the image CG is not visible by at least a part of the movable body CB because the movable body CB and the image CG overlap in a front view (or the movable body CB moves to the first position It becomes difficult to see compared to the case of

  However, the size of the area of the image CG which becomes invisible (or difficult to recognize visually) when the movable body CB moves to the third position is invisible when the movable body CB moves to the second position ( Or, it is smaller than the size of the region of the image CG which is difficult to visually recognize.

  The example shown in FIG. 25C includes two movable bodies, a first movable body CB1 and a second movable body CB2. The first movable body CB1 of this example is the same object as the movable body CB shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b). In addition, the second movable body CB of this example is driven by a motor, a pulley, etc. (not shown) at a fourth position shown in FIG. 25 (c) (1) and a fifth position shown in FIG. 25 (c) (2) And at least a movable object. In the state where the second movable body CB moves to the fourth position, the second movable body CB2 and the non-movable body NCB do not overlap in a front view, so the non-movable body NCB is the second movable body CB2 Therefore, the second movable body CB does not become invisible (or less visible than when the second movable body CB moves to the fifth position).

  On the other hand, since the second movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB overlap in a front view in a state where the second movable body CB2 moves to the fifth position, at least a portion of the non-movable body NCB At least a part of the movable body CB makes it invisible (or invisible as compared to the case where the second movable body CB2 is moved to the fourth position). In the state shown in FIG. 25 (c) (1), a part of the non-movable body NCB is not visible by the first movable body CB1 (or the first movable body CB1 is moved to the first position) In addition to the fact that the second movable body CB2 is not visible by the second movable body CB2 (or the second movable body CB2 is in the fourth position) It becomes difficult to see compared to when moving to

  Further, as shown in (d) and (1) of FIG. 25, when the non-movable body NCB is a liquid crystal display device and the rectangular image CG is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the movable body CB is at the first position. In the moved state, the movable body CB and the image CG do not overlap in a front view, so the image CG is not visible by the movable body CB (or compared to the case where the movable body CB is moved to the second position) And difficult to see). On the other hand, as shown in (d) and (2) of FIG. 25, when the movable body CB moves to the second position, the movable body CB and the image CG overlap in front view, so at least a part of the image CG At least a part of the movable body CB makes the light invisible (or less visible than when the movable body CB is moved to the first position).

The shape of the movable body CB is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (e) (1), a rectangular opening CBe1 is formed in a part of the movable body CB, As shown in FIGS. 25 (e) and (2), when the rectangular notch portion CBe2 is formed on the outer edge of the movable body CB, the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB (or the image CG) overlap in front view However, there is a case where a part of the back side non-movable body NCB (or the image CG) can be visually recognized through the opening portion CBe1 and the notch portion CBe2.
<Moving start trigger of movable body>

  Next, the movement start trigger of the movable body CB according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 (a) is a diagram for explaining a movement start trigger of the movable body CB.

  As a trigger for the movable body CB according to the present embodiment to start moving, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, each control unit (for example, the main control unit 100, the first sub control unit 400, the second When initial setting of the sub control unit 500 and the liquid crystal control unit (VDP) 434 is finished, when the operation by the ball firing handle 134 is accepted, and when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted, the gaming ball 131 starts the starting opening or wins When entering the mouth (or passing), when the initial operation of the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished, when the operation by the various operation units (for example, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142) is accepted, etc. It can be mentioned.

  FIG. 26 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the start of movement of the movable body CB. In this example, the first movable body CB1 moving to the initial position is moved downward upon powering on the pachinko machine 100, and the decorative symbol display device disposed below the first movable body CB1 is displayed. When a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible by the first movable body CB1 by concealing a part of the 208 (or the first movable body CB1 is moved to the initial position) Difficult to see compared to

In addition, while the first movable body CB1 is moving (during the first initial operation), the operation means by the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) of one of the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 is received As a trigger, the second movable body CB2 having a triangular shape in plan view and having been moved to the initial position is rotated with one side as a fulcrum (the second initial operation is performed). The part of the game board 200 that has been obscured by the display becomes visible. In addition, the third movable body CB3 in a fan shape in plan view moving to the initial position is pivoted with one point as a fulcrum (performs the second initial operation), whereby the third movable body CB3 hides and hides it. A part of the game board 200 that has been played can also be viewed.
<Movement timing of movable body>

  Next, the movement timing of the movable body CB according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 27 is a time chart showing an example of movement timing of the movable body CB.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and (1), the movement of the first movable body (initial operation) is started in response to the power being supplied to the game stand, and the movement of the first movable body is ended after a predetermined time. However, the second movable body is not moved (initial operation). Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (2), the operation by the operation means is received after the end of the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body (an operation detection signal from the operation means is input to the sensor (2) start the movement (initial operation) of the second movable body, and end the movement (initial operation) of the second movable body after a predetermined time.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (3), an operation by the operating means is received while the first movable body is moving (initial operation) (an operation detection signal from the operating means is input to the sensor Starting with the movement of the first movable body (initial operation) while starting the movement of the second movable body (initial operation), and after a predetermined time, the movement of the first movable body (initial operation) Of the second movable body (initial operation).

In the example shown in FIG. 27 (b) (1), the movement of the first movable body (initial operation) is started in response to the power supply to the game stand, and the movement of the first movable body (initially) after a predetermined time Although the operation has been completed, the effects (display by the decorative symbol display device 208, light emission by the LED, sound output by the speaker, etc.) are not performed. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 27 (b) and (2), the operation by the operation means is received after the end of the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body (an operation detection signal from the operation means is input to the sensor The effect is started on the occasion of), and the effect is ended after a predetermined time. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 27 (b) and (3), an operation by the operating means is received while the first movable body is moving (initial operation) (an operation detection signal from the operating means is input to the sensor The effect is started while continuing the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body, and the effect is ended after the movement of the movable body (initial operation) is finished after a predetermined time.
<Movement of movable body triggered by power on>

  Next, movement of the movable body triggered by turning on the power will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a state transition diagram showing an example of the operation state of the movable body.

  As described above, the movement start trigger of the movable body CB according to the present embodiment is not limited to the power-on to the pachinko machine 100, but here, as an example, the movable body CB of the movable body CB triggered by the power-on The movement will be described. When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, power is supplied to each control unit (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, liquid crystal control unit (VDP) 434, etc.) Main process of control unit (main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6, first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 8 (a), second control unit main process shown in FIG. 9 (a), liquid crystal control unit (VDP) Execution of the main process 434) is started.

  In the main process of each control unit, the initial operation of the movable body CB is started as one of the processes in the initial setting, and each control unit shifts to the power on initial operation state S1. For example, in the example described using FIG. 26B, as this initial operation, the first movable body CB1 moving to the initial position is moved downward.

  Subsequently, the control unit that has completed the initial operation normally shifts to the operation standby state S2. In the operation standby state S2, detection of detection signals input from various sensors connected to each control unit is performed. Here, as a sensor connected to the main control unit 300, the above-mentioned ball detection sensor, front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, etc. may be mentioned. Moreover, as a sensor connected to the 1st sub control part 400, the above-mentioned shielding apparatus sensor 430, the chance button detection sensor 426, etc. are mentioned. Moreover, as a sensor connected to the 2nd sub control part 500, the above-mentioned effect movable body sensor 424 etc. are mentioned.

  On the other hand, the control unit whose initial operation did not end normally shifts to the error state S4. In this error state S4, after the initial operation is repeated a predetermined number of times (after retrying), if the retry fails, the operation prohibiting state S5 is entered, the operation of the movable body CB is prohibited, and the retry is performed. When it succeeds, it shifts to the operation standby state S2.

Further, the control unit that has detected the signal from the sensor in the operation standby state S2 shifts to the operating state S3. In this operating state S3, a predetermined operation (linear movement, rotational movement, etc.) is executed for each movable body CB, and when the operation is completed, the operation shifts to the operation standby state S2. For example, in the example described with reference to FIG. 26B, the second movable body CB2 having a triangular shape in plan view is triggered by the detection of a signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 as the operation in the operation standby state. While turning on one side as a fulcrum, the third movable body CB3 in a fan shape in plan view is turned on one point as a fulcrum.
<Specific Example of Initial Operation of Movable Body>

  Next, a specific example of the initial operation of the movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present example, it is assumed that the first sub control unit 400 performs movement control of the movable body and detection of the operation by the chance button 136, and the liquid crystal control unit (VDP) 434 performs display control of the decorative symbol display device 208. I do.

The initial operation (return operation) of the movable body is an operation of detecting the current position of the movable body using a sensor or the like, and moving the movable body to the initial position when the current position does not match the initial position. It is For example, when a plurality of movable bodies are not positioned at the initial position, an operation of moving the movable bodies to the initial position one by one with respect to a single change of the special figure (or common drawing), a plurality of movable bodies Even when one of the movable bodies is located at the initial position, an operation of moving all the movable bodies including the movable body to the initial position is included.
<Specific Example 1 of Initial Operation of Movable Body>

  Fig.29 (a)-the figure (k) are the figures which showed the specific example 1 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. The state shown in FIG. 29A is a state immediately after the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, and each control unit starts initialization in the main processing and shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1.

  In this example, the first auxiliary control unit 400 starts the initial operation of the first movable body CB1 in the first auxiliary control unit main processing and shifts to the power on initial operation state S1, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 In the liquid crystal control unit main processing, the initial operation of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started, and the process proceeds to the power on initial operation state S1.

  The following states shown in FIGS. 29B to 29C are states in which each control unit shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1 and executes the initial operation. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1 and performs control to move the first movable body CB1 horizontally to the left, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 performs the power-on initial operation state It transfers to S1 and performs character display of "under activation" using the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 29D is a state in which the liquid crystal control unit 434 normally ends the initial operation and shifts to the operation standby state S2. Here, since the liquid crystal control unit 434 normally ends the initial operation, the characters “in operation” of the decorative symbol display device 208 are erased, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the operation standby state S2 is entered. There is.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the power-on initial operation state S1, and continues control to move the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 29 (d). As shown in 29 (e) to (g), control to move the first movable body CB1 to the right in the horizontal direction is performed. The state shown in FIG. 29 (g) is a state in which the first secondary control unit 400 normally ends the initial operation and shifts to the operation standby state S2.

  FIG. 29H shows a state in which the first sub control unit 400 maintains the operation standby state S2 and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to start the special figure fluctuation start. Here, the liquid crystal control unit 434 starts the variation display of the decoration symbol using the decoration symbol display device 208 based on the instruction of the special figure variation start from the first sub control unit 400.

  In the subsequent FIG. 29I, the first sub control unit 400 maintains the operation standby state S2 and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to execute super (SP) reach effect. Here, the liquid crystal control unit 434 starts the super reach effect using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the execution instruction of the super reach effect from the first sub control unit 400.

  Next, FIG. 29 (j) shows a state in which the first sub control unit 400 maintains the operation standby state S2 and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to execute button effect. Here, the liquid crystal control unit 434 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the instruction to execute the button effect from the first sub-control unit 400, and uses the decorative effect display device 208 (in this example, “press the button”. Character display has started.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 29 (k) is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 receives the detection of the operation by the chance button 136 (the detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to move the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction.
<Specific Example 2 of Initial Operation of Movable Body>

  FIGS. 29L to 29P are diagrams showing, in chronological order, a specific example 2 of the initial operation of the movable body. The states shown in FIG. 29 (l) to FIG. 29 (o) are similar to the states shown in FIG. 29 (g) to FIG. 29 (j), but in this example, in addition to the first movable body CB1, The difference is that the second movable body CB2 is provided.

The state shown in FIG. 29P is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 receives the detection of the operation by the chance button 136 (the detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control of moving the second movable body CB2 upward in the vertical direction, and control of moving the first movable body CB1 is Not performed.
<Specific Example 3 of Initial Operation of Movable Body>

  FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (k) are diagrams showing a specific example 3 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. The states shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to (g) are similar to the states shown in FIGS. 29 (a) to (g), but in this example, in addition to the first movable body CB1, The difference is that the second movable body CB2 is provided.

  The state shown in FIG. 30H is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 receives the detection of the operation by the chance button 136 (the detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, the first auxiliary control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 upward in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 30 (h) to FIG. 30 (i) based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136. After performing the control, the second movable body CB2 is controlled to move downward in the vertical direction, as shown in FIGS.

In this example, the first sub control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136, but as shown in FIG. 30 (l), for example, The first sub-control unit 400 instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to perform predetermined display (in this example, display of an image based on the operation) based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 The first display may be configured to perform a predetermined display using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the instruction to execute the predetermined display from the sub-control unit 400.
<Specific Example 4 of Initial Operation of Movable Body>

  FIGS. 31 (a) to (h) are diagrams showing a specific example 4 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. In addition, since the state shown to Fig.31 (a)-the same figure (d) is the same as the state shown to Fig.29 (a)-the same figure (d), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 31 (e), during the period in which the first sub control unit 400 maintains the power on initial operation state S1 and continues control to move the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction, Detection of an operation by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) is received. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 upward in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 31 (e) to FIG. 31 (g) based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136. Control (initial operation of the second movable body CB2) is performed, and movement control of the first movable body CB1 is continued.

  31 (g) to (h), the first sub control unit 400 ends the movement control of the first movable body CB1, but maintains the power on initial operation state S1, Control for moving the second movable body CB2 downward in the vertical direction (initial operation of the second movable body CB2) is continued.

  In this example, the first auxiliary control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136, but as shown in FIG. 31 (i), for example, The first auxiliary control unit 400 performs control to move the first movable body CB1 (initial operation of the first movable body CB1), and the liquid crystal control unit 434 is determined based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136. (In this example, the display of the image based on the operation), and the liquid crystal control unit 434 receives the display execution instruction of the predetermined display from the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 It may be configured to perform predetermined display using.

With such a configuration, in a state where the first movable body CB1 moves onto the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first movable body CB1 and the predetermined display overlap in a front view, so At least a part of the display can not be viewed by at least a part of the first movable body CB1 (or the visual recognition is difficult compared to when the first movable body CB1 is moved out of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 )become. For this reason, the visual recognition state of a predetermined | prescribed display can be changed easily, and a rendering effect may be able to be heightened.
<Specific Example 5 of Initial Operation of Movable Body>

  32 (a) to 32 (h) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, a fifth specific example of the initial operation of the movable body. In addition, since the state shown to Fig.32 (a)-the figure (g) is the same as the state shown to Fig.30 (a)-the figure (g), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The state shown in FIG. 32H is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 receives the detection of the operation by the chance button 136 (the detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to move the second movable body CB2, and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to display the setting screen described above based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136. The liquid crystal control unit 434 displays the setting screen using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the execution instruction of the display of the setting screen from the first sub-control unit 400.

  With such a configuration, in a state where the second movable body CB2 has moved onto the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second movable body CB2 and the display of the setting screen overlap in front view, so that setting is made. At least a portion of the screen is not visible by at least a portion of the second movable body CB2 (or is difficult to view compared to when the second movable body CB2 is moved out of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208) )become. For this reason, the visual recognition state of the display on the setting screen can be easily changed, and the rendering effect may be able to be enhanced.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 26B) and a plurality of movable bodies (for example, FIG. a game console comprising a first movable body CB1, a second movable body CB2 and a third movable body CB3) shown in b) and a control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400), At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, a first movable body CB1 shown in FIG. 26B), and the control means performs at least a plurality of types of processing. It is an executable means, and at least one of the plurality of types of processing includes the first processing (for example, the second movable body CB2 and the third movable body CB3 shown in FIG. 26B). Processing) and at least one of the plurality of types of processing The second process is a process including at least a process of initially operating the first movable body (e.g., a process of moving the first movable body CB1 downward). The control means is capable of at least executing the first process when the first condition is established, and the first condition is when the operation means is operated. It is a condition that may be established, and the control means is a means capable of at least starting execution of the first process during execution of the second process.

  According to the gaming table of the present embodiment, since the first movable body can be initially operated based on the operation by the operation means, the first movable body can be operated based on the intention of the person who performs the operation (for example, a clerk of the game arcade). The initial operation check of one movable body can be performed, the operation check can be performed more safely than in the past, and it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the initial operation.

  The “first condition” according to the present invention may not be satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may not be satisfied after a power failure and recovery without clearing the RAM. Even if the time has elapsed, if the condition is satisfied once, the condition may not be satisfied again within the predetermined time, and if symbol fluctuation starts, the condition may not be satisfied. It is also good.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, the second movable body CB2 or the third movable body CB3 shown in FIG. 26 (b)), One process may be a process including at least a process of operating the second movable body.

  With such a configuration, the second movable body can be operated in addition to the initial movement of the first movable body, so that the operation confirmation of the first and second movable bodies can be performed simultaneously. In some cases, convenience can be enhanced. In addition, when operating a 1st movable body and a 2nd movable body simultaneously, both may be contactable, and both may be non-contactable.

  Further, the first movable body is a movable body provided at a position where the player can not contact (for example, the inside of a glass frame), and the second movable body is a position where the player can contact. The movable body may be provided (for example, outside the glass frame, above the lower plate).

  Further, the second movable body is a second operation means (for example, a ball launch handle 134, a ball lending operation button 140, a return operation button 142, and a second chance button separate from the chance button 136). May be Moreover, the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is provided, and the first processing is the first display on the display means (for example, the display according to the operation by the chance button 136, the touch operation on the touch panel) It may be a process including at least a process of executing a corresponding display).

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of processing is a third processing, and the control unit is configured to start at least the execution of the third processing when the third condition is satisfied. The third condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated, and the third process may be a process related to an effect.

  The control means is means for starting execution of at least the second process when the second condition is established, and the second condition is that power is supplied to the control means. May be a condition that may hold true. Further, the control means may start the initial operation based on a command received from another control means, or when power is supplied, without waiting for reception of a command from another control means. The initial operation may be started. Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position at least operable from the player (for example, the front side of a pachinko machine or slot machine).

  In addition, it is a game stand provided with control means, wherein the control means is means capable of at least executing a plurality of processes, and at least one of the plurality of processes is a first process. At least one of the plurality of processes is a second process, the first process is a process of executing at least an initial operation, and the second process is a process of performing at least an operation. The control means is means for starting at least the second process in a first period, and the first period may be a period in which the first process is being performed. .

  The operation means is provided at a position at least operable by the player, and the second process is an operation started when a first condition is satisfied. The first condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when an operation by the operation means is received.

  The detection means is a means provided at a position where the player can at least touch, and the second process is an operation started when a second condition is satisfied. The second condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when a touch on the detection means is detected.

  In addition, a plurality of movable means are provided, at least one of the plurality of movable means is a first movable means, and the first movable means is provided at a position where the player can at least contact. The second process may be an operation of moving the first movable means.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of movable means is a second movable means, and the second movable means is a means provided at a position where the player can not contact, and the first movable means The processing of may be an operation of moving the second movable means.

The first process is a process started when a third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is a condition which may be satisfied when power is supplied to the control means. It may be. The second process may be an initial operation. Further, the second process may be an effect. In addition, the initial operation may be an operation including at least a recovery operation after recovery from power interruption.
<Function of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, the basic concept of the function of the operation means provided in the game console according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of the function of the operation means in each state, and FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the operation means.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured to have a plurality of operation means including at least a first operation means and a second operation means. The operation means is a means that can be operated at least by the player. As an example of the operation means, for example, as shown in FIG. 34, in addition to the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137, the ball firing handle 134, the ball pulling button 130, the touch panel 139, a ball discharging lever not shown, a ball lending operation button , A return operation button, a touch panel provided on the front frame door 106, and the like.

  The operation means may be configured by a plurality of operation units (in this example, four buttons in the upper, lower, left, and right and one determination button) as in the setting operation unit 137. In this case, the plurality of operation units (All four buttons, upper and lower, left and right, and one determination button) may be defined as operation means, or at least one of a plurality of operation units (for example, two upper or lower buttons or one determination) A button) may be defined as an operation means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the game console is in the first state (for example, when the setting screen is being displayed), the first function is accepted when the operation by the first operation means is received. It shows that (for example, the function of volume adjustment (in the setting screen) is executed, and nothing is executed when an operation by the second operation means is accepted. In addition, when the game stand is in the second state (for example, in the big hit game), nothing is executed when the operation by the first operation means is accepted, and the operation by the second operation means is performed. It shows that the first function (for example, the function of volume adjustment (during a big hit game)) is executed when it is accepted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33 (b), when the game console is in the first state (for example, when the setting screen is being displayed), the first function is accepted when the operation by the first operation means is received. It shows that (for example, the function of volume adjustment (in the setting screen) is executed, and nothing is executed when an operation by the second operation means is accepted. In addition, when the game stand is in the second state (for example, during the big hit game), the second function (for example, during the big hit game) when the operation by the first operation means is received It shows that the first function (for example, the function of volume adjustment (during a big hit game)) is executed when the adjustment function is executed and the operation by the second operation means is received.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33C, when the game console is in the first state (for example, while the setting screen is being displayed), the operation by the first operation means (or the second operation means) is performed. It shows that the first function (for example, the function of volume adjustment (in the setting screen)) is executed when it is accepted. In addition, when the game stand is in the second state (for example, during the big hit game), it is the same as the example shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33D, when the game console is in the first state (for example, when the setting screen is being displayed), the first function is received when the operation by the first operation means is received. Execute (for example, the function of volume adjustment (in the setting screen)) and execute the third function (for example, selection function of the item (in the setting screen)) when the operation by the second operation means is accepted Is shown. In addition, when the game stand is in the second state (for example, during the big hit game), it is the same as the example shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33 (e), when the game console is in the third state (for example, while the variable display of the special view is shown), the operation by the first operation means (or the second operation means) It indicates that nothing will be executed if it is accepted. In addition, when the game stand is in the fourth state (for example, when the stop display of the special view is in progress), the first operation is accepted when the operation by the first operation means (or the second operation means) is accepted. It indicates that a function (for example, a function of displaying a setting screen) is to be executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33 (f), when the game stand is in the first state (for example, when the setting screen is displayed), the operation by the first operation means (or the third operation means) is It shows that the first function (for example, the function of volume adjustment (in the setting screen)) is executed when it is accepted. In addition, when the game stand is in the second state (for example, in the big hit game), the first function is executed when the operation by the second operation means (or the third operation means) is accepted. It shows that you do.

It should be noted that when the volume adjustment operation is received during the special figure variation game (or during the common figure variation game), the volume adjustment operation during the special figure variation game (or during the common figure variation game) is not accepted, but the special figure variation is After the end of the game (or the game-changing game), it may be configured to display a message indicating that the reception of the volume adjustment operation has been started (for example, a character display such as "Press the chance button"). Further, in this case, the volume adjustment operation may be received before the display indicating that the reception of the volume adjustment operation has been started may be received, or the display may indicate that the reception of the volume adjustment operation has been started. Before the start of the volume adjustment operation may be disabled. Further, in a specific gaming state such as during power support, a display indicating that the reception of the volume adjustment operation has been started is not performed, but the volume adjustment operation may be enabled. Also, in this case, after the end of the volume adjustment, a display may be provided to indicate that the reception of the volume adjustment operation has been started.
<Specific example of structure of operation means>

  Next, a specific example of the structure of the operation means according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a view showing an example of the structure of the operation means.

  FIG. 35 (a) is provided with an effect button 602a on which the characters "PUSH" are applied as the first operation means, and a right button 602b disposed on the right side of the decision button 602a as the second operation means, It is an example provided with the left button 602c arranged on the left side of the decision button 602a. Alternatively, one of the right button 602b and the left button 602c may be defined as a second operation unit, and the other of the right button 602b and the left button 602c may be defined as a third operation unit.

  FIG. 35 (b) is provided with the effect button 604a as the first operation means, and as the second operation means, the decision button 604b and the right button 604c arranged at a predetermined interval with respect to the effect button 604a. , And an example provided with the left button 604d. Note that one of the decision button 604b, the right button 604c, and the left button 604d is defined as a first operation means, the other as a second operation means, and the remaining one as a third operation means. Alternatively, only the determination button 604b may be defined as the second operation means, and the right button 602b and the left button 602c may be defined as the third operation means.

  FIG. 35 (c) is provided with an effect button 606a, a right button 606b, and a left button 606c as the first operation means, and is disposed at a predetermined distance from the effect button 604a as the second operation means. An example in which the second effect button 606d is provided is shown. Note that one of the effect button 606a, the right button 606b, and the left button 606c is defined as a first operation means, the other as a third operation means, and the remaining one as a fourth operation means. Alternatively, only the determination button 604b may be defined as the first operation means, and the right button 602b and the left button 602c may be defined as the third operation means.

  FIG. 35 (d) is provided with an upper button 608a, a right button 608b, a lower button 608c, and a left button 608d as a first operation means, and a predetermined interval for these buttons as a second operation means. An example provided with an effect button 608 e which is disposed vacancy is shown. Note that one of the upper button 608a, the right button 608b, the lower button 608c, and the left button 608d is a first operation means, the other is a third operation means, and the other is a fourth operation. Means, the remaining one may be defined as the fifth operation means, or the combination of the upper button 608a and the lower button 608c is the first operation means, and the combination of the right button 608b and the left button 608d is the third operation It may be defined as a means.

  FIG. 35 (e) has effect button 610a as the first operation means, and has up, down, left and right buttons 610b and a decision button 610c configured by a touch panel as the second operation means, and as the third operation means An example provided with an upper button 610d, a right button 610e, a lower button 610f, a left button 610g, and a decision button 610h is shown. The upper, lower, left, and right buttons 610b configured by the touch panel may be defined as the second operation unit, and the determination button 610c configured by the touch panel may be defined as the fourth operation unit. In addition, one of the upper button 610d, the right button 610e, the lower button 610f, the left button 610g, and the determination button 610h is used as the third operating means, the other as the fourth operating means, the other The fifth operation means may be defined as the other one as the sixth operation means, and the remaining one may be defined as the seventh operation means.

FIG. 35F is provided with a button 612a having a first thickness as a first operation means, and a button 612b having a second thickness thinner than the first thickness as a second operation means. An example is shown. According to this embodiment, the player can easily make the difference between the first and second operation means by the difference in thickness (due to the feeling of touch), and may prevent the operation error in advance.
<Method of detecting operation by operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a method of detecting an operation by the operation unit according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the operation information storage area, and FIG. 36 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the operation information queue.

  In the various updating process (step S 503) of the above-mentioned first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, the information of the presence / absence of the detection signal input from each operation means is stored as operation information in the operation information storage area provided in RAM 408 At the same time, when there is a change in the detection signal, the operation information is stored in the operation information queue provided in the RAM 408.

  The detection signal of the operation means provided with four buttons at the top, bottom, left, and right and one determination button will be described as an example, the buttons (upper button, lower button, right button, Information (operation information) of presence / absence of detection signal of left button, determination button) is read out from the previous operation information storage area provided in the RAM 408, and this operation information is stored in the operation information storage area two times before provided in the RAM 408. The operation information of the button of the operation means detected in the timer interruption process of 4 is read from the current operation information storage area provided in the RAM 408, and this operation information is stored in the previous operation information storage area. Further, the operation information of the button of the operation means detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current operation information storage area.

Further, in the button control process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S311) described above, the operation information queue is monitored, and when the operation information is stored in the operation information queue, one of the operation information queues is selected. The oldest (first stored) operation information is extracted, and processing corresponding to the operation information is performed. In this operation means control process, the operation information of the button of each operation means stored in the previously-previous operation information storage area, the previous operation information storage area, and the operation information storage area this time is compared, Information indicating the presence or absence of the detection signal is a predetermined determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that the previous second operation information is 1 (ON), the previous operation information is 1 (ON), and the current operation information is 0 (OFF)) It is determined whether or not they match. Then, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each button matches the predetermined determination pattern information, processing (for example, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, etc.) corresponding to the operation information is performed.
<Specific example of function of operation means>

  Next, a specific example of the function of the operation means will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIGS. 37 to 39 are diagrams showing specific examples of the function of the operation means in time series.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 37 (a-1) to (a-3), the first secondary control unit 400 detects an operation by the right button 620 once during display of the setting screen. A process of increasing the volume of the sound output means (speaker 12) by one step is executed, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 is instructed to perform a display of increasing the level display indicating the volume by one scale.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37 (b-1) to FIG. 37 (a-5), the first sub control unit 400 performs the first operation using the right button 620 during the special figure variation game shown in FIG. 37 (b-2). On the basis of the detection of the operation, the processing of raising the volume of the sound output means (speaker 12) by one step is executed, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 is displayed to increase the level indication indicating the volume by one scale Are instructed to do. Further, in this example, the first sub control unit 400 detects the second operation with the right button 620 during the special view change game shown in FIG. A process of increasing the volume of the speaker 12) by one step is executed, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 is instructed to perform a display of increasing the level display indicating the volume by one more scale.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37 (c-1) to FIG. 37 (c-5), the first sub control unit 400 performs the first operation by the lower button 622 during the big hit game shown in FIG. 37 (c-2). On the basis of the detection of the sound output means (speaker 12) to increase the volume of the sound output means (speaker 12) by one step. I'm telling you. Also, in this example, the first sub control unit 400 detects the second operation by the lower button 622 during the big hit game shown in FIG. And the liquid crystal control unit 434 is instructed to perform display to increase the level display indicating the sound volume by one more scale.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to (l), the first secondary control unit 400 detects the operation of the right button 620 in the character selection effect in the big hit game shown in FIG. 38 (c). Based on this, the liquid crystal control unit 434 is instructed to perform a display for moving the downward arrow pointing to the temporarily selected character from character A to character B. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the operation of the lower button 622 in the character selection effect in the big hit game shown in FIG. 38E, but in the character selection effect in the big hit game, the lower button 622 Since the function is not given, the process corresponding to the lower button 622 is not performed.

Subsequently, the first sub control unit 400 detects the operation of the lower button 622 after the big hit end shown in FIG. 38 (h), but after the big hit game is finished, the lower button 622 does not have a function. Therefore, the process corresponding to the lower button 622 has not been performed. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the operation of the left button 624 during the special figure change game after the big hit shown in FIG. 38 (k), the sound output means (speaker 12) While executing the process of decreasing the volume by one step, the liquid crystal control unit 434 is instructed to perform the display of decreasing the level display indicating the volume by one scale.
<Modification of operation means>

  Next, a variation of the operation means will be described. FIG. 39 is a view for explaining a modification of the operation means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39A, a plurality of types of operation means having a volume adjustment function are provided. A first operation means 630, which is one of a plurality of types of operation means, is a rotary switch provided at a position where the player can not operate, and for example, is disposed on the back of the game console Ru. On the other hand, the second operation means 632 which is one of a plurality of types of operation means is a button provided at a position where the player can operate, and is provided, for example, in front of the game console .

  Although the volume adjustment can be performed either by the operation by the first operation means 630 or by the operation by the second operation means 632, in this example, the operation by the first operation means 630 (for example, a store clerk of a game arcade or the like) The sound volume adjusted by the operation by (3) can be changed by the operation (for example, the operation by the player) by the second operation means 632. In addition to (or in place of) volume adjustment, a function of light amount adjustment may be provided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39 (b), the function by the operation means is notified. For example, in <the specific example of the function of the operation means described with reference to FIG. 37, it is possible to adjust the volume by the up and down buttons during the big hit at the timing before the start of the big hit game shown in FIG. In the big hit game shown in FIG. 37 (c-3), it may be notified that volume adjustment is possible by the up and down buttons during the big hit. With such a configuration, the convenience of the player may be enhanced.

  The example shown in FIG. 39 (c) is an example of a game console provided with an auto button function. Here, the auto button function is a function that performs the same processing as when the operation of the operating means is received, triggered by a predetermined condition, even when the player does not operate the operating means. In this example, during the operation of the auto button function, the display of "during setting of the auto button" is performed, and the volume adjustment can not be performed even when the operation by the operation means is received. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the situation where the volume adjustment is performed against the player's intention by the auto button function.

  The example shown in FIG. 39D is an example in which the direction in which the operation means is arranged and the direction in which the volume adjustment level display is made the same. In the example shown in the upper part, the arrangement of the left button and the right button is in the horizontal direction, and the level display of the volume adjustment is also increased or decreased in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, in the example shown in the lower part, the arrangement of the upper button and the lower button is in the vertical direction, and the level display of the volume adjustment is also increased / decreased in the vertical direction. With such a configuration, it may be possible to guess the operation means having the function of volume adjustment by using the level display of volume adjustment as a clue, and it may be possible to enhance the convenience of the player.

  The example shown in FIG. 39 (e) is an example of a game console provided with a plurality of types of display means. The first display means 634 of the plurality of types is a liquid crystal display device of a first size, and the second display means 636 of the plurality of types has a second size smaller than the first size. The liquid crystal display device of In this example, while suggesting the operation means having a volume adjustment function in the second display means 636, the level indication of the volume adjustment is performed in the first display means 634 separate from the second display means 636. ing.

  As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of operation means (for example, left and right buttons, up and down buttons) and control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400). At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, left and right buttons), and at least one of the plurality of operation means is a second Operation means (for example, up and down buttons), the control means is a means capable of at least transition to a plurality of types of states, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (for example, (During effect setting by setting screen), at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, during a big hit game), and the first state is the first operation means When there is an operation of It is a state in which at least one control can be performed, and the second state is a state in which at least the first control can be performed when the second operation means is operated. The game console is characterized in that the first control is control related to effect setting (for example, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when performing control relating to effect setting, the operation by the operation means can be made easy to understand, so that it is possible to prevent an operation mistake in advance, the operation means In some cases, it is possible to provide a game with a distinctive feature.

  The second state is a state in which at least second control (for example, control related to character selection) can be performed when the first operation means is operated. The second control may be control different from the first control. The first state may be a state in which at least the second control is not performed when the second operation means is operated.

  Further, the first state is a state in which at least a third control (for example, control related to password setting) can be performed when the second operation means is operated, The third control may be control different from the first control, and the third control may be control different from the second control.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of states is a third state (e.g., during special feature fluctuation), and the third state is when the first operation means is operated. The third state is a state in which at least the second control is not performed when the first operation means is operated. The third state is a state in which at least the third control is not executed when the first operation means is operated, and the third state is the operation of the second operation means. In this case, at least the first control is not performed, and the third state is at least not executing the second control when the second operation unit is operated. In the third state, the second operation means is operated. When the, the third control may be in the state of at least not run.

  In addition, sound output means (for example, the speaker 120) capable of outputting a sound may be provided, and the effect setting may be a setting related to the adjustment of the volume of the sound. Further, the first operation means may be a means provided at a position at least operable by the player (for example, the front side of a pachinko machine or slot machine), or the second operation means. May be a means provided at least at an operable position from the player (for example, the front side of a pachinko machine or slot machine).

  In addition, it is a game console provided with a plurality of operation means and a control means, and at least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means, and among the plurality of operation means At least one is a second operating means, and the first operating means is a means provided at a position at least operable by the player, and the second operating means is from the player. The control means is a means provided at least at an operable position, the control means is a means capable of receiving an operation by the first operation means, and the control means is capable of receiving an operation by the second operation means The control means is a means capable of at least taking a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first state, and of the plurality of states At least one is The control means is a means capable of executing at least a first function when an operation by the first operation means is received in the first state. The control means is It may be means capable of executing at least the first function when an operation by the second operation means is received in the second state.

  The control means is means for not executing the first function when the operation by the second operation means is received in the first state, and the control means is in the second state. It may be means that does not execute the first function when an operation by the first operation means is received.

  Further, the control means is means capable of executing at least a second function when the operation by the first operation means is received in the second state, and the second function is It may be a function different from the first function.

  Further, the control means is means capable of executing at least a third function when an operation by the second operation means is received in the first state, and the third function is The third function may be a function different from the first function, and the third function may be a function different from the second function.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of states is a third state, and at least one of the plurality of states is a fourth state, and the control means is in the fourth state. Means for performing at least the first function when an operation by the first operation means is received, and the control means performs the fourth operation according to the second operation means in the fourth state. It may be means capable of executing at least the first function when accepting an operation.

  The control means is means for not executing the first function when the operation by the first operation means is received in the third state, and the control means is in the third state. It may be means that does not execute the first function when an operation by the second operation means is received.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of operation means is a third operation means, and the third operation means is a means provided at a position at least operable by the player, the control The means is means capable of receiving an operation by the third operation means, and the control means receives at least the fourth function when the operation by the third operation means is received in the first state. It is a means that can be executed, and the control means is a means that can execute at least the fourth function when the operation by the third operation means is received in the second state. It may be.

  Further, it may include sound output means capable of outputting a sound, and the first function may be a function capable of at least adjusting the volume of the sound. The light output device may further include light output means capable of outputting light, and the first function may be a function capable of at least adjusting the light amount of the light.

  <Other Embodiments (embodiment in which the operation of the button is effective even if the button operation display is not performed)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 57, a game console (for example, a pachinko machine, etc.) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which the button operation is enabled even when the button operation is not displayed). The ball game machine and the rotating game machine such as slot machine will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 40 to FIG. 57 are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in 40 to 57 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 40 to FIG. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.

  FIG. 40 is a view for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and shows an example of the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and the effects displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in the figures (a) and (d), an operation means image BG (in this example, the chance button 136 is suggested to suggest operation of the operation means (here, the chance button 138) to the decorative symbol display device 208) And the elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the acceptance period of the operation means (in this example, the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 The operation of the chance button 136 is performed when the operation means operation display (hereinafter referred to as the button operation display) by the image (the reduced display of the scale) is displayed and the effect during the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is executed. (Figures (b) and (e)), the operation is accepted, and as shown in the figures (c) and (f), the player receives an operation by changing the effect mode. To inform that was.

  Here, as an example, the reduction display of the scale of the elapsed time notification image TG is temporarily stopped, and another effect display is performed such as executing another effect display. That is, in this case, when the display for prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) (hereinafter referred to as a button operation display 800) is executed, it corresponds to the button operation display 800 (suggested by the button operation display 800). ) Operation of the chance button 136 (operation acceptance) is effective. In the following description, the button operation display 800 will be described as an example of a display including an operation means image BG imitating the chance button 136 and an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying an elapsed state of the reception period. However, the button operation display 800 is not limited to this example as long as the effect display is for urging the player to operate the specific operation means (informing that it is a reception period of the operation means). In addition, the button operation display 800 may not include the elapsed time notification image TG.

  On the other hand, in the figure (g), there are a plurality of operation buttons which can be operated by the player (here, the chance button 136 and the other operation button 810), and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button 136 The button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of is displayed, but the button operation display suggesting the operation of the other operation button 810 is not displayed. In this case, even if the chance button 136 corresponding to the button operation display 800 (indicated by the button operation display 800) is operated, the operation becomes invalid and the operation of the other operation button 810 becomes effective.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, even when the operation means operation display (button operation display) of the first operation means (the other operation button 810) is not executed, the first operation means (the other operation means) is The reception of the operation of the operation button 810) is enabled.

In addition, in the game console having the first operation means (other operation button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the operation operation means operation display (button operation display 800) related to the second operation button is executed If the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 800 is invalidated, the first operation means (other operation button) in which the button operation display is not performed is performed. The operation of 810) is effective. As a result, there may be a case where the player's interest can be enhanced by giving variety to the button operation effect. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Circuit configuration of control unit>

The circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 roughly divides various devices according to a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the first sub-control unit 400 to control, the second sub-control unit 500 mainly controlling the effect based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, a counter circuit (random number value generation circuit) 318 (random number value generation circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received in the basic circuit 302. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 A predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214; A pattern display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a common view hold lamp 216, a first special view hold lamp 218, a second special view hold lamp 220, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high accuracy lamp 222, etc., and a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special view start port 232 or a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 to be driven is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 232, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the game stand lamp 122 etc.) A circuit 420, a drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of the movable portion of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190, a button detection sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136 and pressing of the button unit 190, and various sensors 430; A sensor circuit 428 outputting detection signals from the various sensors 430 and the button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 is connected.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

In addition, the basic circuit 502 includes the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the movable portion of the movable display device 288, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 at present. The effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the position, the sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, and the game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532. And a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the basic circuit 502 and the game board lamp driving circuit 530.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Liquid crystal control unit>

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described. The liquid crystal control unit 700 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and temporarily stores data based on the CPU 704 that controls the entire liquid crystal control unit 700 based on the control command. The ROM 708 for controlling the whole of the liquid crystal control unit 700, a ROM 506 for storing data for image display, etc., and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 710 are provided. The CPU 704 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 714A as a system clock.

The VDP 710 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 714 B as a system clock, reads image data and the like stored in the CGROM 716 based on a signal from the CPU 404, and uses a work area of the VRAM 718. A display image is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.
<Transmission and reception of data between first sub control unit 400 and liquid crystal control unit 700>

  Next, as a premise of the present embodiment, a general data transmission / reception relationship between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, FIG. 42A shows an example of data held by the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400, and FIG. 42B shows an example of a liquid crystal command. Further, (c) of the figure is a timing chart showing the relationship of transmission and reception of data between the first auxiliary control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The first sub-control unit 400 displays box data (for example, box data A1) shown in (a) of the figure at the timing of each effect execution, such as change start, hold increase, big hit start, button operation effect occurrence, etc. Are set in the box data setting area of the RAM 408. The box data is constituted by a liquid crystal command (here, liquid crystal command 05), a position (here, as an example, a position 00, a position 01) and the like. Thus, the storage position (position) of each part is set in the box data. Here, the position 00 (the start address of) of the part 01 is set as the storage position of the part 01 in the box data, and the position 01 (the start address of the position) is set as the storage position of the part A2. The box data is also set when the first auxiliary control unit 400 sets a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The position is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and parts corresponding to a plurality of positions (here, positions 00 to 9F) are stored. For example, in the example of the figure, the part 01 is stored at the position 00, the part 01 is stored at the position 01, and the part A1 is stored at the position 04. The parts may not be stored in all of the plurality of positions.

  The parts data list is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and stores parts data corresponding to a plurality of parts (here, parts 00, 01, A1 and A2. Parts data corresponds to respective effects. Output sound from the speaker 120 (sound), light emission mode of the lamp L (various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138), game board lamp 532 etc.), movable objects (effect movable bodies 246, 224, movable It is the information of the movable aspect of display 288).

  Each part data includes a sound layer having sound device data, a lamp layer having lamp device data, and an item operation layer having shutter device data and sub liquid crystal movable unit device data. The sound device data, the shutter device data, the sub liquid crystal movable unit device data, etc. have one or more device data here. For example, in the case of having a plurality of lamp device data, the first lamp device data is information of the light emission mode of the lamp at the time of BGM output, and the second lamp device data is information of the light emission mode of the lamp at the time of one-shot notification is there. Also, for example, the number of each layer is one or more, and when there are a plurality of layers, each has a different priority.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the liquid crystal commands (here, the liquid crystal command 05 of the box data A1) correspond to the start of fluctuation, increase of hold, start of big hit, generation of button operation effect, etc. The command (for example, liquid crystal display 0D) for displaying the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the return commands 00 and 01 are included.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the above-mentioned box data (liquid crystal command) at each presentation execution timing (for each effect), transmits the liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and sets each part at the position. Do. When the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, it refers to the corresponding position in the RAM 408, and when part data is stored, the sound of the sound layer of the part data is stored. The light emission mode of the lamp layer and the movable mode of the accessory operation layer are set as transmission commands and transmitted to each device, and effects corresponding to the effect display are performed.

  In addition, fixed data are not stored in a position, but data are replaced at each production execution timing (for each presentation).

  As shown in the figure (c), the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control processing of the first sub control unit main processing, and the liquid crystal control unit so as to perform each effect according to the result. A command for control is sent to 700 and the speaker 120, a lamp, a movable object, and the like. Here, in the present embodiment, a button operation effect (effect related to the operation acceptance of the chance button 136) will be described as an example of the effect. As the effects related to the operation acceptance of the chance button 136, the button operation display 800 ((liquid crystal) effect display in the figure) by the decorative symbol display device 208, the light emission effect ((sub) button LED in the figure) of the chance button lamp 138, There are other sounds and light-emitting effects (in the figure, effects such as (sub) sound lamps), and the timing charts in FIG. 42 to FIG. 48 mainly show these effects.

For example, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a plurality of box data A1... (That is, liquid crystal commands) to the liquid crystal control unit 700 when performing an effect of starting symbol variation (A). A plurality of liquid crystal commands are prepared according to the type of effect, and in this case, for example, in the liquid crystal command, for example, information such as data returned after pressing the chance button 136 or information on the decorative symbol display device 208 A command for instructing the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol is included.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the variable display of the decorative symbol and the notice effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 although not shown, and transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (B). The return command also includes information on the position, and the first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command corresponds to the part data if there is a setting of the position (part data) corresponding to the box data. Configure command transmission settings. For example, when position information is included in the return command, data of various part data (sound, lamp emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the parts stored in the position of the RAM 408 is set as a transmission command, and the speaker 120 , Send to the chance button lamp 138, respectively. Thus, the first sub control unit 400 executes various effects. Although there may be a case where a position which can be said to be a single command is transmitted as a return command, a plurality of positions may be transmitted like box data.

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs timing of performing a button operation effect (a button operation display 800 and an effect accompanying the same) (at timing (C), the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 is activated (reception is started)). The effect display (button operation display 800) for prompting the user to press the button is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (D).

  Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 returns a command to the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of performing the button operation effect (C). This return command includes position information as data for effecting button operation, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received it makes the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 valid (E), and the RAM 408 Data of various part data (light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138) corresponding to the part stored in the position is set as a transmission command, and transmitted to the chance button lamp 138. Also, the drive command of the chance button lamp 138 is transmitted. Thereby, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (F).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period of the chance button 136 (G), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (G). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command ends the operation reception valid period of the chance button 136 (makes the operation reception invalid), and transmits the return command to the first sub control unit 400 (H). Also, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended (I).

The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command ends the operation reception valid period (disabling the operation reception (J)), and various part data (chance button lamp corresponding to the parts stored in the position of the RAM 408 Data of light emission mode 138 and sound etc. are set as a transmission command and transmitted to the chance button lamp 138 and the speaker 120. It also sends these drive commands. Also, control of the chance button lamp 138 and the speaker 120 is performed. As a result, the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 ends (K), and effects such as sounds and other lamps L are executed for a predetermined period ((K) to (L)). Thereafter, symbol variation ends (M).
<Example 1 of Timing Chart>

  FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing an example of general data transmission / reception between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the command (liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400) is shown. It is an example in case button operation production is performed based on a. The same figure (a) shows the case where operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of operation reception of the chance button 136, and the same figure (b) shows during the effective period of operation reception of the chance button 136. , Indicates that the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In the timing chart described below with reference to the drawings, only main timings are extracted, but as described above, transmission and reception of liquid crystal commands and return commands are appropriately performed. In the following timing chart, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 (operation state of the chance button 136, ie, input (operation) present, input (operation) wait, no input (operation)) is also described. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the first sub control unit 400 validates the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub control unit 400 (at the start of the reception) at the timing (A) of the liquid crystal control unit. Send the liquid crystal command to 700. Thereafter, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (B).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts an operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C), and starts executing the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 (D ).

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the timing when the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (the operation acceptance becomes invalid) (E). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 ends the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 (F).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (disabling the operation reception) (G), and the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 End the execution of (H).

  In this example, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the operation acceptance valid period, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is maintained in the state of input waiting (waiting for operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the first sub-control unit 400 validates the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub-control unit 400 (at the start of the reception) the liquid crystal at timing (A). A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the control unit 700. Thereafter, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (B).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts an operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C), and starts executing the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 (D ).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub-control unit 400 (E), the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is in the state of presence of input. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period (disabling the operation acceptance), and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 ends the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 (F). Further, in this example, at this timing, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (F).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (disabling the operation reception) (G), and the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 End the execution of (H). Although illustration is omitted, when the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively received, other effects (for example, display of a cut-in image, etc.) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 after completion of the button operation effect are displayed. It carries out (it is the same also in the following examples).

Thus, in the case of FIG. 43, the operation acceptance effective period of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is started based on the command (liquid crystal command) from the first sub control unit 400. As shown in FIG. 6B, in this example, the liquid crystal control unit 700 receives a command from the first sub control unit 400 (for example, a liquid crystal command corresponding to a button operation) at an unintended timing (I). Even if this is ignored.
<Example 2 of Timing Chart>

  FIGS. 44 and 45 are timing charts showing another example of transmission and reception of general data between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (return It is an example in case a button operation production is performed based on command. 44 (a) and 45 (a) show the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation acceptance of the chance button 136, and FIGS. 44 (b) and 45 (b) In the valid period of the operation reception of the chance button 136, the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the first sub-control unit 400 at timing (A) when the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (starts the reception). Send a return command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  At the timing when the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (the operation acceptance becomes invalid), the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (E), and then displays a decorative symbol. Execution of the button operation effect is ended by the device 208 (F). The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (disabling the operation acceptance) (G), and the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 End (H).

  In this example, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the operation acceptance valid period, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is maintained in the state of input waiting (waiting for operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the liquid crystal control unit 700 to accept the operation of the chance button 136 (at the start of acceptance) at timing (A) the first sub-control unit. Return to 400 and send the command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command ends the operation reception valid period (makes the operation reception invalid), returns to the first sub control unit 400, and transmits the command (F). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (G).

  The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (H), and then ends the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 (I) . Further, in this example, at this timing, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (I).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at the timing (H) at which the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of presence of input.

  FIG. 44 (a) is an example of a timing chart of a configuration for effectively receiving the operation of the chance button 136 immediately before the end of the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to validate reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (start reception), and transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 at timing (A). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  At the timing when the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (the operation acceptance becomes invalid), the liquid crystal control unit 700 returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits a command (E). The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command ends the operation reception valid period, but immediately before that, when the operation of the chance button 136 is executed, the liquid crystal command (broken line While transmitting the arrow (G), the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (disables the operation reception (G)), and emits the light of the chance button lamp 138 End (H).

  In this example, in order to effectively receive the operation of the chance button 136 pressed immediately before the end of the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is as shown in FIG. It is longer than in the case of. Specifically, the operation acceptance effective period of the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (when the operation acceptance is invalidated (G)) (for example, the chance button lamp 138 The timing (H) at which the light emission ends is ended. After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (I).

  As described above, when the chance button 136 is operated immediately before the end of the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 effectively receives the operation, and the chance button is displayed after the end of the button operation effect. Although the effect (not shown) based on the operation of 136 is started, there is a case where the first sub control unit 400 does not effectively receive the operation (does not start the effect).

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not effectively receive the operation and does not start the effect based on the operation of the chance button 136, but until the time when the effect is scheduled to start May run. In addition, at the timing (H) at which the button display effect ends, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the input waiting state is maintained.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the liquid crystal control unit 700 to accept the operation of the chance button 136 (at the start of acceptance) at timing (A) the first sub control unit Return to 400 and send the command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits the command (F). The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (G), and thereafter ends the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 (H). Further, in this example, at this timing, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (H).

Then, at this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception effective period (H), and thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (J).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at timing (G) at which the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of presence of input.

  As described above, each timing chart illustrated in FIGS. 44 to 45 illustrates an example in which the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 starts based on a command (return command) from the liquid crystal control unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 44 (b) and 45 (b), in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 responds to a command (for example, button operation) from the liquid crystal control unit 700 at an unintended timing (J). Even if it receives a return command, it ignores this.

FIG. 46 to FIG. 48 are timing charts showing the relationship of transmission and reception of data between the first auxiliary control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 according to the present embodiment.
<Example 3 of Timing Chart>

  FIG. 46 shows an example in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is enabled based on the command (liquid crystal command) transmitted from the first sub control unit 400, and FIG. 46 (a) shows the operation acceptance of the chance button 136. (B) shows the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the valid period of the operation reception of the chance button 136 during the effective period of the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the first sub control unit 400 enables liquid crystal control at timing (A) where the first sub control unit 400 enables reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (starts reception). The liquid crystal command is transmitted to unit 700. On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (B), but does not start the execution of the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the timing when the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (the operation acceptance becomes invalid) (C). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (makes the operation reception invalid) (D).

  Further, as shown in (b) of the figure, the first sub control unit 400 validates the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub control unit 400 (at the start of the reception) timing (A)). A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (B), but does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub-control unit 400 (C), the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is in the state of presence of input. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period (makes the operation reception invalid), and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. Thereafter, in this example, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start the execution of the effect such as sound (D).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (makes the operation reception invalid) (E).

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the button operation effect (the light emission of the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138 regarding the chance button 136) is not performed, the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit At 700), the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is effective. As shown in FIG. 6B, in this example, the liquid crystal control unit 700 receives a command from the first sub control unit 400 (for example, a liquid crystal command corresponding to a button operation) at an unintended timing (F). Even if this is ignored.
<Example 4 of Timing Chart>

  FIGS. 47 and 48 show an example in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is enabled based on the command (return command) transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700, and FIGS. 47 (a) and 48 (a). Shows the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation reception of the chance button 136, and FIGS. 47 (b) and 48 (b) show the operation during the effective period of the operation reception of the chance button 136. , Indicates that the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the first sub-control unit 400 at timing (A) when the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (starts reception). Send a return command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  At the timing when the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (operation acceptance becomes invalid), the liquid crystal control unit 700 returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits a command (C). The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (makes the operation reception invalid (D)).

  In this example, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the operation acceptance valid period, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is maintained in the state of input waiting (waiting for operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the liquid crystal control unit 700 to accept the operation of the chance button 136 (at the start of acceptance) timing (A), the first sub-control. Return to unit 400 and send a command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (C), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command ends the operation reception valid period (makes the operation reception invalid), and transmits the return command to the first sub control unit 400 (D).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (E). Further, in this example, after that, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like at this timing to start execution of effects such as sound (F).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at timing (E) at which the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of presence of input.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, the liquid crystal control unit 700 activates the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (at the start of acceptance) at timing (A) the first sub-control unit 400. Send a return command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138, and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B ').

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the timing when the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (operation acceptance becomes invalid) (C). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command ends the operation reception valid period. Further, the first auxiliary control unit 400 turns off the chance button lamp 138 (D).

  When the chance button lamp 138 is always on during the operation reception valid period, when it blinks within the operation reception valid period, it is lit (instantly) only for a partial period including the start time of the operation reception valid period. It is assumed that the case is included, and the same applies to the other embodiments.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 48B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the liquid crystal control unit 700 to accept the operation of the chance button 136 (at the start of acceptance) at timing (A) the first sub control unit Return to 400 and send the command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138, and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B ').

When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (C), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits the command (E). The first secondary control unit 400 that has received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first secondary control unit 400 (F). After that, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (G). Then, at this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period, and turns off the chance button lamp 138 (G).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at the timing (F) at which the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of presence of input.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the button operation effect (the light emission of the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138 regarding the chance button 136) is not performed, the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control In part 700), operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is effective. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (for example, a return command corresponding to a button operation) at an unintended timing (H) as shown in FIG. Even if this is ignored.

An example of the button operation acceptance state and the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57.
<Example 1 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect corresponding to the first embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG.

  As shown to the same figure (a), the 4th symbol display area 208e is provided in the display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, for example, by the upper right side. For example, in the fourth symbol display area 208e, for example, "o" is displayed by filling in blue, etc., during the execution of the variation game of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), and is displayed in white while the variation game is stopped. . In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 can perform variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, as indicated by a downward arrow in the upper left of the figure (b), in a part of the display area.

  Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special view 1 display device 212 and a special view 2 display device 214 are provided, and variable display and stop display of the special view are executed. In addition, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 indicate the number of suspended variable games by turning on and off the LED.

  Here, in the display examples shown in FIG. 49 to FIG. 57, the variation display on the special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are not distinguished. Although described, the variable display in the special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 is executed by the main control unit 300, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400. To be executed.

  The timing shown in the figure (a) shows a state in which the variation game of the special figure ends, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, the stop display of the variation game of the special figure (for example, the special figure 2) is in progress. In the special view 2 display device 214, the stop symbol form is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed. In addition, the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off. That is, a state in which the button operation effect is not performed is shown. In the present embodiment (FIGS. 49 to 57), when nothing is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 49A, at least the button operation display 800 (only) is not displayed. And other displays may be displayed.

  This timing is a period other than the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub control unit 400, that is, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid. Similarly, the liquid crystal control unit 700 is a period other than the operation reception effective period, that is, the operation reception state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure indicates that the variation game of the special figure has started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, the variation game of the special figure (for example, the special figure 2) is being executed. The special symbol 2 display device 214 displays the stop symbol form in a stopped state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts variable display of the decorative symbol.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the button operation effect is not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off.

  The operation acceptance states of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalidated.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (A) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, during the special game variation game, the button operation effect is not started, but in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance effective period has started, that is, the first sub control unit 400 The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is effective. On the other hand, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, during the variable game of the special drawing, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is on. Further, although the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is valid, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (C) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is on. Further, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is effective, and the operation acceptance effective period has started in the liquid crystal control unit 700, that is, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also It is effective.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (D) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying. Specifically, the operation means image BG (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 and the character "PUSH !!" suggesting that the image is pressed and the down arrow substantially at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 And the elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the scale of the meter is filled in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136) Image is displayed.

  In addition, the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 continues lighting. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is effective, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also effective.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. That is, here, the button operation display 800 continues in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reduction display in which the filling of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG gradually decreases is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 is made to emit the chance button 136 Continues to light, and in the state where the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in both the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the state where the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) It shows.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (F) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. 43, and shows the state immediately after (g) of the figure. Although the button operation display 800 continues in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decrement display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 continues lighting, but In the 1 sub-control unit 400, the pressing of the chance button 136 ends the operation acceptance effective period, and the operation accepting state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is effective.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (G) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. The button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, and reduction display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is turned off. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalidated, but the liquid crystal control unit 700 is effective in the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 43 (j) is, for example, the timing between (G) and (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 43 (b). The button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, and reduction display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is turned off, and the first sub The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the control unit 400 is invalid. Further, at this timing, the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 43 (k) is, for example, the timing immediately before (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 43 (b), and the image immediately before the end of the display of the button operation display 800 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. doing. That is, in the operation means image BG, the chance button 136 is filled with white, the character of "PUSH !!" is not displayed, and the reduction display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is ended. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation acceptance state of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

Timing shown in (l) of the figure is, for example, timing after (H) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. The button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and another effect display (for example, the display of the cut-in image 806 of the character) is executed. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation acceptance state of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.
<Example 2 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing in time series an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in the figure (a) shows a state in which the variation game of the special figure ends, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, the stop display of the variation game of the special figure (for example, the special figure 2) is in progress. In the special view 2 display device 214, the stop symbol form is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off, indicating that the button operation effect is not performed.

  At this timing, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure indicates that the variation game of the special figure has started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, the variation game of the special figure (for example, the special figure 2) is being executed. The special symbol 2 display device 214 displays the stop symbol form in a stopped state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts variable display of the decorative symbol.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the button operation effect is not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off.

  The operation acceptance states of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalidated.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (A) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the special game is in the variation game, and the button operation effect is not started, but the operation accepting state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid. On the other hand, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying, while the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is turned off. Further, although the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (C) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 continues, and the decrease display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is extinguished. ing. Further, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is effective, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also effective.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (D) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the display of the button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for lighting the chance button 136 is on. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is effective, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also effective.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. That is, here, the button operation display 800 continues in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reduction display in which the filling of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG gradually decreases is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 is made to emit the chance button 136 Continues to light, and in the state where the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in both the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the state where the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) It shows.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (F) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. While the button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decrease display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 continues lighting, but the liquid crystal In control unit 700, the operation reception effective period is ended by pressing of chance button 136, and the operation reception state of chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is effective.

  The timing shown in FIG. 44 (i) is, for example, the timing immediately before (G) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 44 (b), and an image immediately before the end of the display of the button operation display 800 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. (The reduction display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG has ended). The chance button lamp 138 lights up, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalidated, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (H) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. Although the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button lamp 138 is on, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalidated. It has become.

  The timing shown in FIG. 44 (k) is, for example, the timing (I) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 44 (b). The button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation accepting state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalidated. .

Timing shown in (l) of the figure is, for example, timing after (I) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. The button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and another effect display (for example, the display of the cut-in image 806 of the character) is executed. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation acceptance state of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.
<Example 3 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect corresponding to the third embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure was complete | finished. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off, indicating that the button operation effect is not performed.

  At this timing, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown to the figure (b) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure was started. The button operation effect has not been started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off. The operation acceptance states of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalidated.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (A) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, during the special game variation game, the button operation effect is not started, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 becomes valid, and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 The operation acceptance status of is invalid. That is, although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 in the first sub control unit 400 is valid.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 remains non-display, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off. On the other hand, in the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (C) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the button operation effect (lighting of the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138) is not being performed, and the state where the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) is shown.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is, for example, the timing after (C) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. Although the button operation effect is not executed, in the first sub control unit 400, the pressing of the chance button 136 ends the operation acceptance effective period, and the operation accepting state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is effective.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. The button operation effect is not executed, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the button operation effect is not executed (the button operation display 800 is not displayed), but in the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700), the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is It becomes effective.
<Example 4 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure is performing. Although the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the first image 804 other than the button operation display 800 is displayed. In addition, the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off.

  The timing shown to the figure (b) has shown the state after operating the chance button 136 by the timing following the figure (a). Although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, when the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), a second image (for example, a cut-in image of a character (for example, a character)) is displayed, as shown in FIG. It overlaps at least a part of the first image 804 displayed in a). As a result, at least a portion of the first image 804 is covered by at least a portion of the second image 806, and visibility for the player becomes low (impossible to see or difficult to see).

In addition, the first image (image to be hidden) 804 may be at least one of the elapsed time notification image TG, the status notification image SG, the hold display, the pre-reading notice effect display, other effect display, or a combination of these. . The status notification image SG is a meter display, and refers to a display in which the display mode can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. The establishment of the change condition is, for example, when the time from the start of display of a predetermined image (state notification image SG) has elapsed, or when a predetermined operation means is operated (one or more operations, long press, etc. Etc.). Specifically, it means an image in which the filled portion of the meter increases (or decreases) depending on the number of times of continuous hitting of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) or the time of long press. In addition, the second image 806 (image to be hidden) may be at least one of the elapsed time notification image TG, the hold display, the status notification image SG, the advance notice effect display, and other effect display, or a combination thereof. When the first image is a meter display such as the elapsed time notification image TG or the status notification image SG, either the start end (start time) or the end end (end time) is the second image 806. It may be hidden or an intermediate part (intermediate time between the start time and the end time) may be hidden by the second image 806.
<Example 5 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of a button operation acceptance state and a button operation effect corresponding to the fourth embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure was complete | finished. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off, indicating that the button operation effect is not performed. At this timing, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown to the figure (b) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure was started. The button operation effect has not been started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off. The operation acceptance states of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalidated.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (A) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the special game variation game is underway, and the button operation effect is not started, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 becomes valid, and the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 The operation acceptance status of is invalid. That is, although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the operation accepting state of the chance button 136 is effective in the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 remains non-display, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off. On the other hand, in the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (C) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the button operation effect (lighting of the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138) is not being performed, and the state where the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) is shown.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (D) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. Although the button operation effect is not executed, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation reception valid period ends when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is effective.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. The button operation effect is not executed, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in the figure (l) is a timing following the figure (g). The button operation effect is not executed, and another effect display (for example, a cut-in image 806 of a character (a character)) is displayed. The operation acceptance states of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalidated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the button operation effect is not executed (the button operation display 800 is not displayed), but in the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700), the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is It becomes effective.
<Example 6 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine is provided with a plurality of operation means operable by the player, and specifically, in addition to the chance button 136, at least another operation button 810.

  Another operation button 810 is an operation button different from the chance button 136 suggested to be operated by the button operation display 800. Further, even if there is no button operation display suggesting the operation of the other operation button 810, the effect is executed by the operation of the other operation button 810. In the present embodiment, such other operation button 810 is described as a back button.

In the timings shown in (a) and (b) of the figure, the variation game of the special figure is started, and the button operation display 800 indicating the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed. In this example, even when the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed, the chance button lamp 138 is off.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows the state after pressing the chance button 136. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is no change such as a new effect being performed, and only the decrease display of the elapsed time notification image TG is performed. That is, even if the chance button 136 is pressed while the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed, the operation is invalidated.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates a state in which the back button 810 is operated (pressed), which is not suggested by the button operation display 800.

The figure (f) has shown the state after pressing the back button 810. FIG. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of a character (ten)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display indicating the operation of the button is not performed (the lighting of the button is not performed) is made effective. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810 which is different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810 is effective.
<Example 7 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. The present embodiment is also configured to include the chance button 136 and the back button 810.

In the timings shown in (a) and (b) of the figure, the variation game of the special figure is started, and the button operation display 800 indicating the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the chance button 136 whose operation is suggested by the button operation display 800 is pressed. In this example, even when the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed, the chance button lamp 138 is off.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows the state after pressing the chance button 136. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is no change such as a new effect being performed, and only the decrease display of the elapsed time notification image TG is performed. That is, even if the chance button 136 is pressed in the period in which the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed (the same figure (c)), the operation is invalidated.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E shows a state in which the back button 810 is lit by the back button lamp 812 not suggested by the button operation display 800. The back button lamp 812 is turned on, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136. Alternatively, the back button lamp 812 may be turned on at the timing when the operation reception effective period of the back button 810 starts.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state where the back button 810 is operated (pressed) while the back button lamp 812 is on.

  FIG. 6G shows a state after the back button 810 is pressed. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of a character (ten)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display indicating the operation of the button is not performed (the lighting of the button is not performed) is made effective. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810 which is different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810 is effective. Furthermore, when the lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 is satisfied, the back button lamp 812 is turned on. The lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 can be, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136, or after the operation reception valid period of the back button 810 starts.

In the present embodiment, in the figures (c) and (d), the operation of the chance button 136 is invalidated, but may be effective.
<Example 8 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. The present embodiment is also configured to include the chance button 136 and the back button 810.

The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state in which the variation game of the special figure starts and the button operation display 800 which suggests operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates a state in which the chance button lamp 138 of the chance button 136 indicated by the button operation display 800 is lit. On the other hand, the button operation display of the back button 810 is not performed, and the back button lamp 812 is also turned off.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the back button 810 is operated (pressed) that is not suggested by the button operation display 800.

  The figure (d) shows the state after pressing the back button 810. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of a character (ten)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display indicating the operation of the button is not performed (the lighting of the button is not performed) is made effective. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810 which is different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810 is effective. That is, even if there is a button operation effect (the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138 being lit) indicating the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. The operation of a button (back button 810) different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by is effective.

Also in this example, the operation of the chance button 136 may be enabled, or the back button lamp 812 may be turned on when the lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 is satisfied.
<Example 9 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. In the present embodiment, only the chance button 136 is provided.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure is stopping. At this timing, the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 is also turned off. Further, the acceptance status of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown to the figure (b) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure was started. At this timing, the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 is also turned off. Further, the acceptance status of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 starts displaying during the variation game of the special view and the chance button lamp 138 is lit. At this timing, the accepting state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 becomes effective.

  The timing shown to the figure (d) has shown the state in which the button operation display 800 started display, and predetermined time passed. The button operation display 800 is continued, and the chance button lamp 138 is also kept on. Further, the acceptance status of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is effective.

  The timings shown in (e) and (f) of the figure show a state where the deletion condition of the button operation display 800 is satisfied and the button operation display 800 is not displayed. The deletion condition of the button operation display 800 can be an operation of the chance button 136 (or another button), an elapse of a predetermined time, or the like. Further, even at this timing, the acceptance status of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid. In these timings, the chance button lamp 138 may be kept on even after the button operation display 800 is not displayed.

  As described above, the game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes the first operation means (for example, chance button 136) and the display means (for example, with the decorative symbol display device 208). A control unit (for example, in the first sub control unit 400), the display unit is a unit capable of at least executing a plurality of types of display, and the control unit is a plurality of types At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, a display displayed when executing a normal button operation effect), At least one of the displays is a second display (for example, a display displayed when a normal button operation effect is not performed, a display at the time of back button effect, etc.), and among the plurality of types of displays, At least one of them is a third display (for example, a display at the time of a button operation effect (including a button operation display 800)), and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display (for example, , Back button operation effects, etc. effects that do not include the button operation display 800), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (for example, normal button operation effects can be performed) State, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (e.g., a state in which a normal button operation effect is not performed), and the first state is the first state. When the operation means is operated, at least a first control (for example, control for executing a normal button operation effect) can be performed, and the second state is the first state. There is an operation of the operation means In a case, at least a second control (for example, a control in which a normal button operation effect is not executed) can be performed, and the first control executes the first display on the display means. The second control is at least control including the control for causing the display means to execute the second display, and the third display is the case in the first state And the fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the case of the second state, and the third display is a first image For example, it is a display including at least a button operation display 800), and the fourth display is a display not including at least the first image, and the first image (for example, the first operation means (for example, , Chance button 136) The first operation means is a means including at least a light emitting means (eg, chance button lamp 138), and the light emitting means is a means that emits light in the first state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the light emitting means is means which does not emit light in the second state.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to button operation effects.

  Also, the chance button lamp 138 may emit light in the first state and may not emit light in the second state. The light emission of the chance button lamp 138 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400, but the light emission may be controlled by another control means.

  In addition, a second operation means (a back button 810, another chance button, a button used when changing the volume, etc.) is provided, and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display (for example, , Display corresponding to the operation of the back button 810), at least one of the plurality of types of states is a third state, and the first state is an operation of the second operation means And the third state is the third control (e.g., the back button 810) when the second operation means is operated. And the third state is a state in which at least the third control is not performed when the first operation means is operated. And the third control is the table Including at least control a control to execute display the fifth to the means may be a thing.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to button operation effects.

  In addition, after the control means receives the first command from the second control means (for example, the liquid crystal control unit 700), the control means is at least in the second state (for example, a state where a normal button operation effect is not performed). It may be a means for transition.

  Also, the second state (for example, a state in which a normal button operation effect is not performed) is a state different from the first state (for example, a state in which a normal button operation effect is performed) It is also good.

  The second operation means (for example, the back button 810) may be different from the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136).

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of display may be a sixth display (for example, an effect display displayed after the back button 810 is operated).

  Also, the sixth display (for example, the effect display displayed after operating the back button 810) may be a display including at least a second image (for example, an image including information advantageous to the player). Good.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of states may be a fourth state (for example, a demonstration image display state or a fluctuation gaming state).

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine.

  In addition to button operation effects, button operations may be effectively accepted, and even if button reception information is not referred to in a certain control process, button operations may be effectively accepted. In addition, when the button reception information is not referred to in a certain control process, the button operation may not be effectively received.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be provided with a second operation means (back button 810), and the back button 810 in this case is used for other chance buttons, selection buttons, volume change, etc. Or the like. The back button 810 may or may not have a lamp (back button lamp 812) for causing the back button 810 to emit light. In addition, even if the back button 810 is operated with no button operation display suggesting the operation of the back button 810, the operation corresponding to the back button 810 (for example, when the back button 810 is a volume change button, etc.) May be performed, or the operation may not be performed.

  When the back button 810 is another chance button, the effect corresponding to the back button 810 is executed even if the back button 810 is operated in the first state (a state in which normal button operation effects can be performed). Or the effect may not be performed. When the back button 810 is provided, there may be back button operation effects corresponding to the back button 810 or there may be no back button operation effects.

  The first sub control unit 400 may shift to the second state (back button state) when receiving a command (for example, a return command) from the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  As described above, when the chance button 136 is operated, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the first state in which the normal button operation effect can be performed and the second state in which the normal button operation effect is not performed. It is possible to shift at least between the states of Then, in the first state, the first display displayed at the time of executing the normal button operation effect can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the second state, the first display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normally It is possible to display a second display that is displayed when the button operation effect of is not performed. Further, a third display, which is a display (including the button operation display 800) at the time of the button operation effect, can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the third display is in the case of the first state. , Is a display that may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display different from the display at the time of normal button operation presentation (display not including the button operation display 800, or the operation of the button different from the button whose operation is actually effective) A fourth display, which is a suggested display etc.) can be displayed, and the fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the second state.

  The second state is the back button state, in which the button operation display 800 is not displayed, but the operation of the chance button 136 can be effectively accepted. Alternatively, although the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, the operation of another button (physical back button 810) different from this is effectively received. That is, when the operation of the back button 810 is effectively accepted, the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 different from this when the game is provided with the physical back button 810 is referred to here. It can be said that it is the second display.

  In addition, even when the button operation display 800 is not performed, acceptance of the button operation may be enabled (button reception state).

  When the button operation display 800 is performed, acceptance of the button operation may be enabled (button accepting state), and the lamp of the button may be turned on.

  Further, when the acceptance of the operation of the back button 810 is enabled, the back button lamp 812 may or may not be on. Further, when the acceptance of the operation of the back button 810 is enabled, the back button lamp 812 is turned on only for a moment and then turned off, but the acceptance of the operation of the back button 810 may be enabled even while the light is off. .

  Further, in the above description, when there are the first operation button and the second operation button, the operation of the first operation button is performed even if there is no button operation display suggesting the operation of the first operation button. The thing that effect is executed by is referred to as the "back button", but there is no button operation indication that suggests the operation of the first operation button, and the lamp that lights the first operation button is extinguished. Even in the presence state or in the presence state, one whose effect is executed by the operation of the first operation button may be set as the “back button”.

  In addition, when the first image 804 is displayed and the button operation display is not performed, when the operation button is pressed, another effect display (display of the second image 806) is executed, and the other effect display is performed. It may be overlapped with another display to hide it.

  In addition, when the first image 804 is displayed and the back button 810 in which the button operation display is not performed is operated, another effect display (display of the second image 806) is executed, and the other effect display is performed. It may be overlapped with another display to hide it. For example, the first image 804 (image to be hidden) is the button operation display 800 (operation means image (image imitating the chance button 136) BG and elapsed time notification image (meter) TG) of the chance button 136 and the chance is When button operation display 800 of button 136 (operation means image (image simulating chance button 136) BG and elapsed time notification image (meter) TG is displayed, another effect display (operation of back button 810) The display of the second image 806 is performed, and the other effect display 806 overlaps with a part of the meter (the start time point, the end time point, the middle time point, etc. of the button operation reception period), In this case, the first image 804 may be only the elapsed time notification image (meter) TG). . In addition, the first image (image to be hidden) 804 may be at least one of the state notification image SG, the hold display, the pre-reading effect display, or a combination effect thereof. In addition, the second image 806 (image to be hidden) may be at least one of the hold display, the status notification image SG, the pre-reading display effect, or a combination effect thereof.

  Also, a plurality of back buttons 810 may be provided, in which case the first hidden effect is executed by the first back button, and the second hidden effect is executed by the second back button. It is also good.

  In addition, even after the button operation display 800 is erased based on the display end of the elapsed time notification image (meter) indicating the operation reception period or the button operation, the operation button whose operation has been suggested by the button operation display 800 The operation of (or back button) may be effectively accepted (during the actual operation acceptance effective period), and at that time, the operation button (or back button) may be on or off. It is also good.

  In addition, when there are the first operation button (back button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the second operation button does not transmit a command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the first operation button The command may be transmitted only during the operation acceptance valid period of the operation button (during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400), in which case the operation acceptance valid period of the first operation button (back button 810) A button operation effect (light emission, sound, etc.) of the back button 810 may be executed during that time.

  In addition, even if either the first operation button or the second operation button is operated, a command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (hereinafter referred to as the first sub-control) Control by the unit 400 may be called), or a command may be transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the first sub-control unit 400 (hereinafter referred to as control by the liquid crystal control unit 700), or Even if it is, you may add the information of whether it is the operation command in the operation reception effective period.

  Further, in control based on the first sub control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 may receive a command only during an operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700. Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 always receives a command, shifts to processing for analyzing the received command only during the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, or branches based on the information included in the command. It may be Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 always receives a command, shifts to processing of analyzing the received command only during the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and branches based on the information included in the command. It is also good.

  Further, the button operation immediately before the button lighting may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is lit may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation just before the button is turned off may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  In addition, the button operation immediately after the button is turned off may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately before the button lighting may not be accepted by the first sub control unit 400, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is lit may not be accepted by the first sub control unit 400, or may be accepted.

  In addition, the button operation immediately before the button extinguishment may not be accepted by the first sub control unit 400, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is turned off may not be accepted by the first sub control unit 400, or may be accepted.

  In addition, even when the button operation is performed within the operation reception valid period of the button, the command may be transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the end of the operation reception valid period, or the command may be sent to the liquid crystal control unit side. May be transmitted, and the same processing may be performed at the end of the fluctuation. This makes it possible to reset the effect (safety control) when a command is missed.

  In addition, the button lights up at a predetermined timing within the operation acceptance effective period of the button, and the special effect may be executed when the button is operated at that timing, and the special effect is not executed even if the button is operated at the timing ( There is no change in the effect).

  Further, in the configuration provided with the back button 810, the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 may be started even while the auto button is being set. For example, the back button lamp 812 may be turned on during the operation reception effective period of the back button 810 even if the auto button is being set.

  When the button operation display 800 of the second operation button (chance button 136) is displayed, even if both the second operation button and the first operation button (back button 810) enable the operation reception Good.

  When the button operation display 800 of the second operation button (chance button 136) is displayed, the operation reception of the second operation button is invalidated, and only the operation reception of the first operation button (back button 810) is received. It may be enabled.

  In the configuration that performs control based on the liquid crystal control unit 700, although the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400 based on the command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700. You may start the button operation acceptance effective period with. By doing this, for example, after displaying effects (other than the button operation display 800) on the decorative symbol display device 208 in cases other than the effects of the back button, effects such as sound output are performed by the first sub control unit 400. When the processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is lowered, it may be possible to prevent the previous baring by the sound output (the display can not be enjoyed if the lost sound is heard earlier during the display of the stumbling effect). .

  In the above description, the configuration described for the first sub-control unit 400-based control can also be applied to the liquid crystal control unit 700-based control.

The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game console described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.
(Supplementary note)

  A game console (e.g., pachinko machine 100) includes control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 and / or liquid crystal control unit 700), display means (e.g., decorative symbol display device 208), and operation means (e.g., A game button provided with the chance button 138), wherein the display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display, and the first display is a display (for example, a button relating to at least the operation means) The control means is means for validating at least the reception of the operation of the operation means in the first period, and in the first period, the display means It is a game console characterized by at least a display start period of one display.

  That is, in the present embodiment, even when the operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800, the operation (acceptance) of the operation button (chance button 136) is validated.

  Further, the operation means includes a first operation means (back button 810), the operation means includes a second operation means (chance button), and the first display indicates at least the first operation. A display that does not include a display related to the means (for example, a button operation display for the back button 810), and the first display indicates a display for at least the second operation means (for example, the button operation display 800 for the chance button 136) It is a display including, The control means is means for validating acceptance of the operation of at least the first operation means in the first period.

  That is, in the game console having the first operation button (back button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the first operation different from the second operation button whose operation is suggested by the button operation display 800 The operation (acceptance) of the operation button (ie, the first operation button whose operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800) is validated.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to button operation effects. In the present embodiment, a button for which acceptance of the operation is effective regardless of the operation being suggested by the button operation display 800 is referred to as a back button in the present embodiment, but the back button is a physical back button and a control back Includes any of the buttons. That is, even when the operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800, when the operation of the operation button (chance button 136) is enabled (the acceptance thereof), the physical chance button 136 is controlled It also functions as a back button. On the other hand, in the game console having the first operation button (back button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the reception of (the operation of the first operation button whose operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800) In the configuration that enables), the operation button 810 different from the chance button is configured as a physical back button.

  Also, the control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700) is a unit that invalidates the reception of the operation of the second operation unit in the first period. It is also good.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to button operation effects.

  In addition, the first light emitting means (for example, the back button lamp 812) is provided, and the first light emitting means has a second period (for example, after an operation acceptance period for the back button 810 has elapsed) until a predetermined time has elapsed. Means for enabling the first operation means to emit light in the period (d), and the control means is means for enabling reception of at least the operation of the first operation means in the second period, It may be Further, the control means may be means for invalidating reception of at least the operation of the second operation means in the second period.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to button operation effects. Further, since the button (back button) whose operation is currently effective can be suggested in stages, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from being ineffective.

  In addition, a second light emitting means (for example, chance button lamp 138) is provided, and the second light emitting means is a means for enabling the first operating means to emit light in a third period, and the third light emitting means The period may be a period starting at least after the first period starts. Further, the game console may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  According to such a configuration, by causing the player to recognize the button whose operation is invalid as if it is effective and causing the player to recognize it, it is possible to give more variety to the button operation effect to enhance the player's interest There are times when you can.

  <Other Embodiments (embodiment in which there are a plurality of times from the pressing of a button to the execution of effects such as sound output)>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. 65, a game console (for example, a pachinko machine etc.) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which there are a plurality of times from button press to sound presentation). The ball game machine and the rotating game machine such as slot machine will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 58 to FIG. 65 are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in 58 to 65 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 58 to FIG. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.

  FIG. 58 is a view for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and shows an example of effects (button operation effects) related to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation acceptance of the operation means. Here, the button operation effect in the present embodiment is an effect associated with the operation acceptance of the button (chance button 136), and the button operation display 800 by the decorative symbol display device 208, sound (rendering sound) output based on the button operation Say the production of etc.

  The figure (a) is a figure which shows an example of a normal button operation presentation. The normal button operation effect is, for example, an effect that enables reception of one button operation during a button operation valid reception period.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display (button operation display 800) for prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) is executed, and it is informed that the operation reception valid period of the chance button 136 is being received.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (once) during the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first sub control unit 400 receives the button operation, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a liquid crystal command based on the button operation. Ru. The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command erases the button operation display 800, and executes a first effect display 820 based on the button operation (here, an effect of displaying a cut-in image of a character). In addition, the first auxiliary control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 at the execution timing of the first effect, and outputs an effect sound.

  As described above, in the normal button operation effect, effects are produced such that the effect of the effect sound output by the first sub control unit 400 and the timing of the first effect display 820 by the liquid crystal control unit 700 are matched.

  On the other hand, FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of the button continuous hitting operation effect. The button continuous hitting operation effect is, for example, an effect that enables reception of a plurality of continuous button operations (button continuous hitting operation) during the operation valid acceptance period of the button.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display (button operation display 800A) for prompting the continuous hitting operation of the operation means (chance button 136) is executed, and it is informed that the continuous hitting operation acceptance effective period of the chance button 136 is in effect.

  When the player continuously presses the chance button 136 during the operation acceptance valid period of the chance button 136, the first sub control unit 400 accepts the button operation, and a liquid crystal command based on the button operation is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. Then, after the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and outputs the effect sound, the liquid crystal control unit 700 that receives the liquid crystal command performs a second effect based on the button operation (the continuous hitting operation of the button is being executed) Display 822) indicating (informing) that

  As described above, in the button continuous hitting operation effect, the effect of the effect sound output by the first sub-control unit 400 and the timing of the second effect display 822 by the liquid crystal control unit 700 do not coincide, for example, the effect sound output is the second It is executed prior to the effect display 822.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and FIGS. 59A and 59B are timing charts showing the relationship between the button operation and the effect sound output, and FIG. It is an example in the case of operation production, and the figure (b) is an example in the case of button continuous hitting operation production. Further, FIG. 7C is an example of the effect data management table.

  As shown in (a) of the figure, in the first button operation (normal operation of the chance button 136), execution start of button operation effect (output of effect sound according to button operation) from button operation (A) ( The period up to B) is the first period t1.

  On the other hand, as shown in (b) of the figure, in the second button operation (the continuous hitting operation of the chance button 136), the execution start of the button operation effect (effect sound output according to the operation) from the first button operation (A) ( The period up to B) is the second period t2, and the second period t2 is shorter than the first period t1.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the first period t1 and the second period t2 depend on the timing of transmission and reception of commands between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. (C), the first sub-control unit 400 holds the data table, and based on this, the first period t1 and the second period t2 are set. It may be one. For example, in FIG. 6C, the number of interruptions from detection of button operation to output of presentation sound is held as a table. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 can output an effect sound at a predetermined timing with reference to the table at the time of effect execution.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the period from the button operation to the start of the output of the effect sound differs between the normal button operation effect and the button continuous hitting operation effect, and the button operation effect of the button continuous hitting operation effect is more normal It is shorter than that. Further, in the normal button operation effect, the effect display and the output of the effect sound are executed at substantially the same timing, but in the button continuous hitting operation effect, the output of the effect sound is executed prior to the effect display. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the dynamic feeling of the button continuous hitting operation effect, and it may be possible to enhance the player's interest.

Hereinafter, this will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The circuit configuration of the control unit of this embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG.
<Example 1 of timing chart of button operation and button operation effect>

  With reference to FIG. 60, the timing chart of the button operation and the button operation effect of this embodiment will be described. The figure (a) is a timing chart in the case of button continuous hitting operation, and the figure (b) is a timing chart in the case of usual button operation.

  The first sub control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process of the first sub control unit main process, and performs the liquid crystal control unit 700 and the speaker 120, the lamp L, and the movable object so as to perform various effects according to the result. Although a command for control is transmitted to M, here, as an example of the effect, a button operation effect (effect related to operation acceptance of the chance button 136) will be described. As the effects related to the operation acceptance of the chance button 136, the button operation display 800 ((liquid crystal) button display in the figure) by the decorative symbol display device 208, the light emission effect ((sub) button LED in the figure) of the chance button lamp 138, There is an output of the effect sound (and other light emission) effects (in the figure, effects such as (sub) sound), and the timing chart of FIG. 60 shows only these effects. Further, FIG. 60 is an example of the case where the button operation effect is executed based on the command (return command) transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700).

As shown in FIG. 6A, the liquid crystal control unit 700 activates the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (at the start of acceptance) to the first sub control unit 400 at timing (A). Send a return command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the display of the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is a display that suggests button continuous hitting operation of the chance button 136. In addition, the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes according to the state of the button continuous hitting operation, and the display mode (display state) of the button operation display 800 suggesting the button continuous hitting operation changes accordingly. It may be. In this example, with the increase in the number of times the button is continuously hit, the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes to three levels (in FIG. In the button operation display 800, the display mode (display state) has three stages (the state (a) shown by the (liquid crystal) button display state in the figure (a)) according to the change of the rendering state of the first sub control unit 400. Shall change to The button operation display 800 displayed at the timing (B) is a display of the status A.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  If the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (if the first operation among the continuous hitting operation is performed) (E1), the first sub control unit 400, A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E1). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the speaker 120, and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120 (F1).

  Similarly, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E2 to E6) each time the chance button 136 is continuously hit (E2 to E6), and the first auxiliary control unit 400 receives a speaker The part data is transmitted to 120, and the effect sound is output from the speaker 120 (F2 to F6).

  Moreover, in this example, the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is the state a from the first to the second in the continuous hitting operation, but at the third timing (E3) in the continuous hitting operation, the first sub control unit The rendering state of 400 changes from state A to state i. At the timing after the output of the effect sound (F3) based on the third time of the continuous hitting operation, the button operation display 800 changes to the display of the state A (G).

  Further, at the timing after the output (F6) of the effect sound based on the sixth time of the continuous hitting operation, button operation display 800 changes to the display of state c, and at the same time, the operation acceptance effective period in liquid crystal control unit 700 is End (operation acceptance becomes invalid) (H). The liquid crystal control unit 700 returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits a command (H). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (deletes) the button operation display 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 (I).

  After that, the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period (makes the operation reception invalid), and the rendering state of the first sub control unit 400 changes from the state a to the state c (J). Thereafter, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off (K).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the normal button operation effect, the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables reception of the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (timing to start reception) (A) , And returns to the first sub control unit 400 to transmit a command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the display of the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is a display that suggests a normal operation (for example, one press) of the chance button 136. Therefore, in this case, the rendering state of the first sub control unit 400 does not change according to the state of the button operation, and the display mode (display state) of the button operation display 800 suggesting the button operation changes. There is nothing to do.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  When the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and transmits the return command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (deletes) the button operation display 800 (G).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (H) and turns off the chance button lamp 138 (I).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of the button continuous hitting operation effect, from the button operation (the timing (E1) in the same figure (a)) to the output of the effect sound (the timing (F1 in the same figure (a)) The period (t2) is shorter than the period (t1) from the button operation of the normal button operation effect (timing (E) in FIG. 7B) to the output (I) of the effect sound.

  That is, in the case of the button continuous hitting operation effect, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 when there is a button operation, but does not wait for a return command for the liquid crystal command. The control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 to output an effect sound.

On the other hand, in a normal button operation effect, when a button operation is performed, a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs the first sub control After being transmitted to the unit 400, the effect sound is output.
<Example 2 of timing chart of button operation and button operation effect>

  Another example of the timing chart of the button operation and the button operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a plurality of button operations can be performed within a button operation acceptance effective period, and an effect is executed (a state of effect changes) each time a button operation is performed. That is, the state of the effect of the first sub control unit 400 changes from the initial state to the state A whenever the button is operated, and accordingly, the display of the button operation display 800 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 The mode (display state) changes from the initial state to the state A-.

As shown in the figure, the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to validate reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (start reception), and returns the command to the first sub control unit 400 at timing (A). Send. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the display of the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is a display of an initial state, for example, a display that suggests the first button operation of the chance button 136.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  When the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E) ). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from the initial state to the state (G). The display of the status is, for example, a display that suggests the second button operation of the chance button 136.

  The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command of the timing (F) transmits the part data to the speaker 120, and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120. Further, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is initial state Change to state a (H).

  When the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (I), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (I ). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command transmits the return command to the first sub control unit 400 (J). Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from state A to state B (K). The display of the state A is, for example, a display that suggests the third button operation of the chance button 136.

  The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command of the timing (J) transmits the part data to the speaker 120 and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120. Further, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is state-ascribed Change to state a (M).

  If the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (N), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (N ). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (O). Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from the state a to the state c (P). The display of the state c is, for example, a display indicating that the operation acceptance effective period of the chance button 136 has ended or the like.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command of the timing (O) ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400, transmits the part data to the speaker 120, and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120 Also, the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 is changed from the state a to the state c (Q). After that, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the chance button lamp 138.

In this embodiment, a button operation can be made a plurality of times within the operation acceptance effective period, and while the state of the effect changes for each button operation, the period from the button operation to the effect sound based on the button operation It is slower than in the case of operation effects. That is, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700 when the button operation is performed, as in the case of the normal button operation effect, and the return command for the liquid crystal command is After the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits to the first sub control unit 400, an effect sound is output.
<Example 1 of button operation and button operation effect>

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the button continuous hitting operation and the button continuous hitting operation presentation corresponding to the first embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 60 (a) in time series.

  As shown to the same figure (a), the 4th symbol display area 208e is provided in the display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, for example, by the upper right side. Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and a special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are provided. Since these configurations are the same as those shown in FIG. 50, the description will be omitted.

  This timing is, for example, the timing of (B) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 60 (a), and shows a state in which the variation game of the special view has started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e , The special figure 2) displays that the variation game is being executed, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays the stop symbol aspect in the stop state, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display area Fluctuation display has been started. Further, the button operation display 800 is displayed substantially at the center of the display area. This button operation display 800 is a display that suggests a button continuous hitting operation, for example, an operation means image BG (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 and a character of "continuous hit !! suggesting to hit it continuously" And the down arrow image) and an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, according to the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 And the image is displayed with a filled scale. Further, in this example, a status notification image SG indicating the status of continuous hitting is also displayed. The status notification image SG is a meter display, and refers to a display in which the display mode can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. The establishment of the change condition means, for example, when the time from the start of display of the display of the predetermined image (state notification image SG) has elapsed, or when the number of times of the continuous hit operation of the button has increased. In addition, at this timing, the speaker 120 does not output the rendering sound.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E1) of the timing chart shown in (a) of FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 60C is, for example, the timing of (F1) in the timing chart shown in FIG. The state in which the effect sound is output from the speaker 120 after the period t2 has elapsed since the button operation shown in FIG.

The timing shown in FIG. 60D indicates, for example, a state after the timing of (F1) to the timing of (E2) in the timing chart shown in (a) of FIG. Not showing.
<Example 2 of button operation and button operation effect>

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation and the button operation effect corresponding to the first embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 60 (b) in time series.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. Since it is the same as that of FIG. 62 (a) except that instead the character of "PUSH !!" indicating a single button operation is displayed, the description is omitted.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E1) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. 60, and is in a state where a button operation (one operation) is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 60C indicates, for example, a state after the timing of (E) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 60B and before the timing of (G), and the button operation display 800 is continued. However, the speaker 120 does not output the effect sound corresponding to the button operation.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (I) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. The state in which the rendering sound is output from the speaker 120 after the period t1 has elapsed since the button operation shown in FIG. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the first effect display 820 displayed based on the button operation is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the output of the operation sound corresponding to the button operation and the first effect display 820 displayed based on the button operation have substantially the same timing.
<Example 3 of button operation and button operation effect>

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing another example of the button operation and the button operation effect in time series, and is an example of the effect using the character (movable body).

The timing shown in FIG. 63 (a) indicates that the character appears by displaying the character "The character is falling intensely due to the character falling in addition to the effect display in FIG. 63 (a)". The rest is the same as FIG. 63 (a), so the description is omitted.
The timing shown to the figure (b) is the state which performed button operation.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and another effect display (other than the button operation display 800) displayed based on the button operation (for example, a third effect such as an effect image) A state in which the display 816) is displayed is shown.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows a state in which the effect sound is output from the speaker 120 after a predetermined period (for example, period t1) elapses from the button operation shown in (b) of the figure. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and superimposed on the third effect display, the first effect display 820 (other than the button operation display 800) displayed based on the button operation (for example, , The image of the role is shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, the output of the operation sound corresponding to the button operation and the first effect display 820 other than the button operation display 800 displayed based on the button operation have substantially the same timing.

Further, in this effect example, even if the button operation shown in FIG. 6B is a normal button operation or a button continuous hitting operation, the period until the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation is, for example, 60 (b) is equivalent to the period t1. As described above, in the case of the effect utilizing the special effects, the period from the button operation to the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation may be a fixed period regardless of the state of the button operation.
<Example 4 of button operation and button operation effect>

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a button operation and a button operation effect corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 61 in time series.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 61, and the state of the effect is the same as that of (a) in FIG. Also, the button operation display 800 in FIG. 6A is in the initial state.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 61, and is in a state where the first button operation is executed.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows, for example, a state after the timing of (F) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 61 to before the timing of (G). Although the button operation display 800 from the figure (a) is continued, the state which the presentation sound corresponding to button operation is not output from the speaker 120 is shown.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows, for example, the state of the periods (G) to (H) of the timing chart shown in FIG. While the button operation display 800 is continued, in addition to that, the first display 824 is displayed, and the state of the button operation display 800 changes from the initial state to the state A (timing (G) in FIG. 61). The first display 824 is, for example, a display of “in normal reach” of the face image of the character (殿) and the balloon. After that, the effect sound corresponding to the first button operation shown in FIG. 61B is output from the speaker 120 (timing (H) in FIG. 61).

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (I) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 61, and is in a state where the second button operation is executed.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows, for example, the state of the period from the timing (I) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 61 to the timing (H). The button operation display 800 and the first display 824 are continued, and the effect sound is not output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in the figure (g) shows the state of the period of (K)-(L) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 61, for example. While the button operation display 800 is continued, in addition to that, the second display 826 is displayed, and the state of the button operation display 800 changes from state A to state A (timing (K) in FIG. 61). The second display 826 is, for example, a display of the face image of the character (殿) and a balloon “When Chibi Princess Appears”. After that, the effect sound corresponding to the second button operation shown in FIG. 61E is output from the speaker 120 (timing (L) in FIG. 61).

  As mentioned above, in this embodiment, although the case where the production sound corresponding to button operation was output was explained to the example as an example of button operation production, other production may be sufficient. That is, it may be the light emission effect of the lamp L (including the chance button lamp 138) corresponding to the button operation, the operation effect of the movable body, or the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 similarly. The same effect can be obtained.

  As described above, the game console (e.g., pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes the operation means (e.g., chance button 136), the presentation means (e.g., speaker 120), and the control means (e.g., , The first sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect means is means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects, and the control means is at least capable of transitioning to a plurality of types of states Means, at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state, the plurality of types of effects At least one of the first effects (for example, effects including at least an effect sound at the time of button operation in button continuous hit effects), at least one of the plurality of types of effects is (Eg, effects including at least a sound effect at the time of a button operation in a normal button effect), and the first state is a first control (eg, a button when the operation means is operated). In the state where it is possible to execute at least the continuous hitting effect control), and in the second state, at least the second control (for example, the normal button effect control) is executed when the operation means is operated. The first control is a control including at least control for causing the effect means to execute the first effect (for example, button continuous hit effect), and the second control is The control includes at least control for causing the effect means to execute the second effect (for example, normal button effect), and the first control is performed after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the operation means. The control to be started, the second control is a control that is started after the second time has elapsed from the operation of the operation means, and the second time is longer than the first time. It is a game console characterized by having a long time.

  With such a configuration, various button operation effects can be made according to the button operation, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  In addition, the first state is a state in which transition is made in the case of the button continuous hitting effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect of outputting a sound (hereinafter, referred to as "first sound output effect"). The second effect may be an effect including at least an effect for outputting a sound (hereinafter referred to as “second sound output effect”).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic sense of the effect in the button continuous hitting operation effect in the case of the button continuous hitting operation.

  Further, in the case of the first state (the button continuous hitting operation effect), the first control causes the first sound output effect to be executed after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second In the case of the state (normal button operation effect), the second sound output effect is executed after the second time has elapsed since the operation of the chance button 136 by the second control, and the second time is It is a time longer than one time.

  The button continuous hitting operation effect here is the first effect including at least the sound effect (effect sound) at the time of the button operation in the button continuous hitting operation effect, and the normal button operation effect is the button operation in the normal button operation effect This is a second effect including at least sound effects of time. The first control is control that is started after the first time from the operation of the chance button 136 and the second control is after the second time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136 In the control to be started, the second time may be shorter than the first time or may be substantially the same time.

  The second effect also includes sound effects other than sound effects at the time of button operation. In addition, the second effect includes an operation of the movable body and a sound effect accompanying the operation of the movable body. In addition, another sound effect may not be output before the second effect starts after the chance button 136 is operated (prior to the second effect).

  Further, in the case of the first state (the button continuous hitting operation effect), the first sound output effect is executed after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second state (normal button operation In the case of the effect), the second sound output effect is executed after the second time has elapsed since the operation of the chance button 136, and the second time is a time longer than the first time.

  Further, the second sound output effect may be an effect different from the first sound output effect.

  Further, the second sound output effect may be the same effect as the first sound output effect.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of states may be a third state (for example, a demonstration state or a fluctuation gaming state).

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of effects may be a third effect (for example, a demonstration screen display or a variable display).

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest in response to the button operation. That is, in the case of the button continuous hitting operation effect in the case of the button continuous hitting operation, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic feeling of the effect as compared with the button operation effect by the normal blow operation. The first display and the second display may be the same display.

  In the first state, the time from the first button operation (normal button operation) to the start of the effect execution corresponding to the button operation effect (effect start period) is the first time, and in the second state The time from the second button operation (button continuous hitting operation) to the start of effect execution may be the second time, and the first time may be shorter than the second time, or the first time and the second time The time may be the same (same) time.

  Further, the effect start period may be different between the normal button operation effect and the button continuous hitting operation effect.

  In addition, in the case of a button operation effect in which an effect is executed each time the button is operated within the operation reception effective time of the button, the effect start period may be the same for each button operation. In this case, the effect start period for each button operation may be approximately the same period as the effect start period of the normal button operation, or may be longer or shorter than that.

  In addition, the presentation start period may be as long as the presentation start period of the normal button operation presentation only when the last button operation in the button continuous hitting operation presentation is performed.

  In addition, at the time of button continuous hitting operation production, 1st secondary control section 400 transmits the liquid crystal command to liquid crystal control section 700 for every button operation, but liquid crystal control section 700 returns to 1st secondary control section 400 each time and transmits the command Alternatively, depending on the content of the command from the first sub control unit 400, a return command may be transmitted. According to the contents of the command from the first sub control unit 400, the following can be mentioned as an example of transmitting a return command.

(1) This is the case, for example, when the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is changed by the button continuous hitting operation.

(2) When it is desired to change the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 by the button continuous hitting operation, a predetermined command is transmitted, and the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is changed by the return command for that. Thus, the effect state in the liquid crystal control unit 700 and the effect state in the first auxiliary control unit 400 can be matched.

(3) It is a case where the return command is sent at the final point of the effect (at the end of the operation acceptance effective time), whereby the first sub control unit 400 side can obtain the final information of the liquid crystal control unit 700 side. That is, by branching the subsequent processing based on the final information on the liquid crystal control unit 700 side, it is possible to perform rendering in accordance with the final information on the liquid crystal control unit 700 side.

  As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 can allocate the time required for processing of the return command reception to the time for executing other processing by configuring the first secondary control unit 400 not to receive the return command each time the button continuous hitting operation effect is produced. In some cases, other effects (for example, lamp lighting and output of other effect sounds) can be made more elaborate.

  In addition, at the time of button continuous hitting operation production, the effect start period is shorter than that at the time of normal button operation production, and after the button operation operation, it becomes effect sound output in a short time (immediately). The effect sound may overlap, resulting in a more powerful effect.

  In addition, at the time of the button continuous hitting operation production, except for the final round of the button operation, the effect sound is output in a short time (immediately) after the button operation, while the final round of the button operation is from the liquid crystal control unit 700. Since the effect sound is output by the return command, the effect start period is extended only in the final round of the button operation, and as a result, it may be possible to prevent a monotonous effect.

  In addition, when the effect start period is extended (in the case of an ordinary button operation effect or the like), for example, the player may be made to recognize that the time for which the other effect sound that has been output before the button operation can be heard is extended. There is a possibility. Alternatively, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to recognize so that other effect sounds output before the button operation can not be heard during a long effect start period.

  Further, in the button continuous hitting operation effect, a plurality of effect sounds that are continuously output in a short period corresponding to the button operation may be overlapped effects or may be an effect not overlapping.

  In addition, the table of the effect start period held by the first sub control unit 400 is not limited to the configuration in which the length of the effect start period is controlled by transmission and reception of commands between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. You may manage and may control the length of the presentation start period (refer FIG.59 (c)).

  As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the embodiment of the present invention comprises an operating means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1) and a rendering means (for example, 3), and the operation means is a means provided at a position where the player can operate, and the effect means includes a plurality of types of effects. It is an executable means, and one of the effects of the plurality of types is a first effect (for example, an effect display in a button continuous hitting operation effect, an operation sound output, etc.) One of the effects is a second effect (for example, an effect display in a normal button operation effect, an effect sound (sound effect) output, etc.), and the first effect and the second effect are different. The effect is that the operation of the operation means is It is characterized in that the time from the operation of the operation means to the start of the second effect is longer than the time until the first effect is started. It is a game stand.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize the dynamic feeling of the button continuous hitting operation effect, and it may be possible to enhance the player's interest.

  In addition, that the operation means is operated in the first button effect (for example, effect based on button operation shown in FIG. 60 (a) and FIG. 61, effect based on button operation shown in FIG. 62). Then, the first effect is started, and a second button effect (for example, an ordinary button operation effect, an effect based on a button operation shown in FIG. 60 (b), an effect based on a button operation shown in FIG. 64 (b) The second effect is started when the operation means is operated in the effect related to the back button, the display effect of the cut-in image of the character ()) shown in FIG. 54 (f), etc.). The button effect and the second button effect may be different button effects.

  Further, the first button effect may be a button continuous effect, and the second button effect may be a button effect different from the button continuous effect. In addition, the button continuous hitting effect may be an effect that can be executed in response to a plurality of operations of the operation means. The first effect is a first sound (for example, the button operation sound in the button continuous hitting operation effect, the sound of FIG. 65D based on the button operation shown in FIG. 65B). It is an effect to be output, and the second effect is a second sound (for example, an effect sound to be executed based on an operation of the operation means in a normal button operation effect, or a first sound shown in FIG. 58A). It is an effect that outputs a sound that is output after the effect display 820 (such as a cut-in image) is displayed, an effect sound other than an effect sound at the time of button operation, an effect sound with the operation of a movable body, etc. The first sound and the second sound may be different sounds, and the second sound may be a sound relating to the rendering operation of the movable means.

  Further, the first effect is an effect of displaying a first display (for example, the operation means image BG shown in FIG. 62 (c), FIG. 62 (d), an elapsed time notification image TG, etc.) The second effect is an effect of displaying a second display (for example, a first effect display 820 (for example, a cut-in image or the like shown in FIG. 63D)), and the first display and the second The display of may be another display. In addition, the effect means is a third button effect (for example, effects based on the button operation shown in FIG. 64, effects shown in FIG. 65 (e) and FIG. 65 (e) based on the button operation shown in FIG. The third button effect may be a button repeat effect different from the first button effect. In addition, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation means image BG shown in FIGS. 62C and 62D) may be able to be displayed.

  Further, one of the plural types of states is the first state (for example, the state where the volume and the light amount are not the minimum value or the maximum value shown in FIG. 37A-1), and the volume and the light amount are State in which the meter representing the state is displayed or the state in which the volume or the light amount is not the minimum value or the maximum value shown in FIG. 37 (b-1)), and one of the plural types of states is the second state State (for example, a state shown in FIG. 37 (b) in which selection effects are performed and selection effects are received), and in the first state, the operating means (for example, FIGS. 37 and 38) are operated by the operator. In response to the operation of the right button 620), the degree of notification changes (for example, the sound volume in the sound output means (speaker etc.) changes, or the light amount in the light emitting ), To the operator in the second state In response to said operation means is operated me, demonstration is performed (e.g., one alternative is selected from among the multiple choice in the selection effect) or may be.

In addition, a plurality of the rendering means (hereinafter referred to as "plural rendering means", for example, the first movable body CB1, the second movable body CB2, and the third movable body CB3 shown in FIG. 26B) One of the rendering means of the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means (for example, the second movable body CB2 shown in FIG. 26B), and one of the plurality of rendering means The second rendering unit is a second rendering unit (for example, the first movable body CB1 shown in FIG. 26B), the first rendering unit is a movable unit, and the first rendering unit is A means provided at a position where the player can make contact, and a state in which a confirmation operation (for example, an operation in which the first movable body CB1 moves downward) of the second rendering means is being performed For example, after the power is turned on (RAM clear &), the end of the confirmation operation of the second rendering means Even if the operation of the operation means is performed in a certain state), the execution of the confirmation action of the first effect means is started during the execution of the confirmation action of the second effect means. Good. The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine. In addition, the gaming machine may be a slot machine.
In addition, the game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes an operation means (for example, chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1) and a presentation means (for example, speaker 120 shown in FIG. 3), and the operation means is a means provided at a position where the player can operate, and the effect means includes a plurality of types of sounds. , And one of the plurality of types of sounds is a first sound (for example, the effect sound “done !!” output from the speaker 120 in FIG. 63 (d)). One of the plurality of types of sounds is a second sound (for example, the effect sound "Pasi !!" output from the speaker 120 in FIG. 65 (d)), the first sound The sound aspect and the second sound aspect are different states , And the said first sound, the first button effect (e.g., shown in FIG. 60 (b), regular buttons (operation) effect) when said operation means is operated in a certain operating mode in (e.g. 63 (b) is the first sound whose output is started in response to the operation in the case of the normal button operation (when the button is pressed once) shown in FIG. 63 (b), and the second sound is the second sound. When the operation means is operated in a certain operation mode in a button effect (for example, a button effect capable of performing a plurality of button operations within a button operation acceptance valid period shown in FIG. 61) (for example, FIG. 65 (b) In the normal button operation (when the button is pressed once) shown in, it is the first sound whose output is started according to the operation, and the first button effect and the second button effect are different a button production, the certain operation aspect, long press The time from the operation timing of the operation means to the output start timing of the second sound (for example, from the timing shown in FIG. 65 (b) to the timing shown in FIG. 65 (e)). 61, and the time from the operation timing of the operation means to the output start timing of the first sound (for example, from the timing shown in FIG. 63 (b)). The time until the timing shown in (d), that is, the time from timing E to timing I in FIG. 60 (b), may be different times.
The first sound is the first sound whose output is started according to the operation when the operation means is operated in a certain operation mode in the first state, and the second sound is In the second state, when the operation means is operated in a certain operation mode, it is the first sound whose output is started according to the operation, and the first state receives the operation of the operation means One of the states may be a state, and the second state may be a state other than the first state among the states for receiving the operation of the operation means.
The second state may be a state in which an operation of the operation means in button rendition is received.
In addition, a control means (for example, a control unit, a first auxiliary control unit 400) is provided, and the control means can output the first sound when detecting the one-time pressing operation by the operation means, It is also good.
Further, the control means may be capable of outputting the second sound when detecting the one-time pressing operation by the operation means.
Further, the control means can perform a first control, the control means can perform a second control, and the first control is an operation of the operation means. In this case, the control is to output the first sound in a first time from the operation timing of the operation unit, and the second control is an operation timing of the operation unit when the operation unit is operated. control der outputting said second sound in a second time from is, the second control and the first control may me different control der.
The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine. In addition, the gaming machine may be a slot machine.

The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game console described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.
(Supplementary note)

  The game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a game console provided with operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and effect means (for example, the speaker 120 etc.) for executing effects. The operation unit is a unit capable of receiving a first operation (for example, a normal operation), and the operation unit is a unit capable of receiving a second operation (for example, a button continuous hitting operation), The rendering means is a means capable of executing a first rendering (for example, output of rendering sound) in the first state, and the rendering means is a second rendering (for example, outputting of the rendering sound in the second state) The first state is a state after a first time has elapsed after the operation means receives the first operation, and the second state is After the operation means receives the second operation, A state after the second time has elapsed, the first time and the second time is gaming table characterized by a different time, that.

  With such a configuration, various button operation effects can be made according to the button operation, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  Moreover, the first time may be longer than the second time. The first operation is an operation operated with a first number of times during the reception period of the operation means, and the second operation is a second number of times during the reception period of the operation means The operation may be an operation, and the first number may be a number smaller than the second number. The second operation may be a continuous operation of the operation means.

That is, when there are a plurality of button operation modes (a first button operation mode and a second button operation mode), the button operation is performed from the button operation by the first button operation mode (for example, normal button operation) The period until the effect corresponding to (for example, the output of the effect sound) (hereinafter, this period is referred to as the effect start period) is the first period, and the button operation by the second button operation mode (for example, button continuous hitting operation) The presentation start period from the second to the presentation corresponding to the button operation (for example, the output of the presentation sound) may be a second period, and the first period may be longer than the second period.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic sense of the effect in the button continuous hitting operation effect in the case of the button continuous hitting operation.

  In addition, the display device (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is provided, and the display device is a first effect (a first effect based on a button operation) corresponding to the first operation (for example, a normal button operation). Means for displaying the display 820), and the display means displays a second display (for example, a second effect display 822 based on the continuous hitting operation) corresponding to the second operation (for example, the button continuous hitting operation) It is a means that can be displayed, and the effect means (for example, the speaker 120) is a means for starting execution of the first effect (for example, output of effect sound) in accordance with the start of the first display, The effect means may be means for starting execution of the second effect (for example, output of effect sound) before the start of the second display.

  That is, in the normal button operation effect, the effect display period displayed according to the timing of the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation and the normal button operation by lengthening the effect start period Control to match the timing with the effect display of 1) is performed. On the other hand, in the button continuous hit operation production, the effect display period displayed according to the timing of the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation (button continuous hit operation) and the button operation (button continuous hit operation) by shortening the effect start period Control is performed such that the timing with the second effect display (based on the continuous hitting operation) is not synchronized (the timing is made different).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest in response to the button operation. That is, in the case of the button continuous hitting operation effect in the case of the button continuous hitting operation, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic feeling of the effect as compared with the button operation effect by the normal blow operation. The first display and the second display may be the same display.

  <Other Embodiments (embodiment in which the character change effect is canceled when a predetermined interruption occurs during the character change effect (character determination effect))>

  Next, another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which a predetermined interruption occurs during a character change effect, the embodiment for canceling that effect) (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine) Etc.) will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 66 to 74 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in 66 to 74 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 66 to FIG. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram for describing an overview of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing an example of a character change presentation.

  For example, when the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the gaming stand of the present embodiment executes effects such as symbol variation display. Then, when a predetermined effect (for example, an effect of a big hit game, an effect of a bonus game) is started, a character change effect capable of selecting and determining a character to be appeared in the predetermined effect from among a plurality of characters It is feasible. The character change effect is configured to include a character introduction effect and a character selection effect. The character introduction effect displays (in the case where the player moves between the characters with the selection button) by displaying (in sequence) a plurality of characters (effects including the case where the player moves between the characters by the selection button) It refers to an effect that displays an image (temporarily selected image) in a state (temporary selection state) in which selection determination has not been made, and the character selection effect is after selecting and selecting a specific character from a plurality of characters ( An effect to be executed after selection with the enter button.

  When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is judged as a big hit determination), the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 to execute the character change presentation start command to execute the character change presentation Send The first sub control unit 400 having received the character change presentation start command starts the character change presentation when a predetermined condition is established (for example, when the start condition of each round in the big hit game is established).

  The character introduction effect is, for example, sequentially centering a plurality of selectable characters based on acceptance of the operation of the selection button (left button) 136a or the selection button (right button) 136b during execution of the character introduction effect. It is an effect that makes it move and make it stand out. Specifically, as shown in the figure (a), the first character (殿) is the front center of the display area, and the second character (爺) is the rear left, and the third character (キ ャ ラ ク タ) is An image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “temporarily selected image of the first character (ten)”) is displayed that is located respectively in the rear right and makes the first character (ten) in the center of the front stand out clearly If, for example, the operation of the selection button (left button) 136a is accepted while the character introduction effect is being executed, the second character (character (殿)) currently displayed (provisionally selected) is displayed. It is an effect of executing an animation to change to a character (爺).

  In addition, with the character selection effect, as shown in the figure (b), the character currently being temporarily selected (here, the character (爺)) is received based on the fact that the operation of the determination button 136 is accepted during execution of the character introduction effect. Is selected as the character after change, and, for example, a character string of a balloon "I'll put it to you" is displayed, and an effect sound "I'll leave it to you" is outputted from the speaker 120.

  Then, in the normal character change effect, the character is changed to the character determined by the character selection effect, but in the present embodiment, in the character selection effect (the state of FIG. In the case where the game ball wins in the starting opening (for example, the first special drawing starting opening 230 and / or the second special drawing starting opening 232) as shown in, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 In the process, the character selection effect is canceled.

As described above, by making it impossible to change the character until the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, it is possible to secure a sufficient game interval when changing the character, and to suppress the player's irritability. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Example 1 of Timing Chart of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 67 is an example of a timing chart of character change effect according to the present embodiment, in which processing is executed based on a command from the first sub control unit 400 (control led by the first sub control unit 400). It is an example. The figure (a) is a case of a normal character change presentation, and the figure (b) shows the timing chart when a predetermined | prescribed interruption exists during execution of a character change presentation. In the same figure, the outline of the effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 is also described. Further, “representation” in the figure indicates a character selection effect, and “operation” indicates an operation of the determination button 136.

  As shown in the figure (a), in the normal effect, the character introduction effect is being executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 at timing (1). In this state, since the character is undecided, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 maintains the state of the character (here, the character A) determined by the previous character change effect. Further, in this example, the character A is in the temporary selection state in the decorative symbol display device 208, but the character of the temporary selection can be moved between the characters A and B by the operation of the selection button. In the meantime, the internal selection state does not change.

  When the operation of the determination button 136 is performed in a state in which the character B is temporarily selected by the operation of the selection buttons 136a and 136b (2), the character selection (determination) effect of the character B is started. When the predetermined execution period of the character selection effect ends (3), the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated to the character B, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, another effect (for example, a demonstration screen etc.) Is executed (4). Thereafter, the determined character B appears and the game proceeds (5).

In the figure (b), in the state where the character B is temporarily selected by the operation of the selection buttons 136a and 136b as in the figure (a), the operation of the determination button 136 is performed (2). ) Start the production. Then, if an interrupt occurs before the predetermined execution period of the character selection effect ends, the character selection effect is canceled halfway (3). Since the character selection effect is canceled, the determination of the character B is also canceled, and the character A determined last time is also maintained in the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400. Then, the character A appears and the game proceeds (4).
<Example 2 of Timing Chart of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 68 is an example of a more detailed timing chart of FIG. The figure (a) is a case of a normal character change production, and the figure (b) is an example of a timing chart when a predetermined | prescribed interruption exists during execution of a character change production. Further, “cursor position” in the drawing indicates the position (one of the characters A to C temporarily selected) temporarily selected by the selection buttons 136 a and 136 b.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub control unit A command 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown here).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub control unit 400 sends the liquid crystal control unit 700 A liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown here).

  When the decision button 136 is operated in the temporarily selected state of the character C, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the character selection of the character C in the first sub control unit 400 Execution of the effect ("C effect" shown) is started. The C effect is, for example, an effect of outputting an effect sound such as “determined to be a character C” from the speaker 120 (4). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts executing the character selection effect (“C effect” shown in the drawing) of the character C in the decorative symbol display device 208 (5). When the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 ends (6) and the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (7), the first sub control unit 400 starts the internal selection state from the character A of the previous time. The character C determined this time is updated, and a liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (8). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command updates the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (9).

  As shown in (b) of the figure, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub control unit A command 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown here).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub control unit 400 sends the liquid crystal control unit 700 A liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown here).

  When the decision button 136 is operated in the temporarily selected state of the character C, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the character selection of the character C in the first sub control unit 400 Execution of the effect ("C effect" shown) is started. The C effect is, for example, an effect of outputting an effect sound such as “determined to be a character C” from the speaker 120 (4). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts executing the character selection effect (“C effect” shown in the drawing) of the character C in the decorative symbol display device 208 (5).

If an interrupt (cancel factor) occurs during execution of the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (6), the first sub control unit 400 cancels the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (cancellation) And transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (6). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 cancels (cancels) the character selection effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 (7). Since the character selection effect in the first sub control unit 400 is canceled, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is not updated to the determined character C, and the information of the character A determined last time is It is held. Similarly, in the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700, the information of the character A is held.
<Example 3 of Timing Chart of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 69 shows another example of the timing chart of the character change effect, and is an example of the case where control is executed based on a command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700). The figure (a) is a case of a normal character change presentation, and the figure (b) shows the timing chart when a predetermined | prescribed interruption exists during execution of a character change presentation. Also, FIGS. (C) and (d) are examples of specific effects.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub control unit A command 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub control unit 400 sends the liquid crystal control unit 700 A liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown).

  When the decision button 136 is operated in the temporarily selected state of the character C, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 having received this returns a return command. Are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 (4). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to start executing the character selection effect of the character C (5). The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command executes the character selection effect of the character C in the first sub-control unit 400 (for example, an effect such as outputting an effect sound such as “decided to the character C” from the speaker 120). Start (6). When the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (7), the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 from the previous character A to the character C determined this time, and performs the first sub control. Return to the unit 400 and transmit a command (8). When the predetermined execution time is over, the first sub control unit 400 ends the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (8). When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (9).

  In (b) of the figure, the timings (1) to (6) are the same as (a) in the figure, so explanations will be omitted, and the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be executed. If an interrupt (cancellation factor) occurs during the process (7), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command returns to the first sub-control unit 400 and transmits the command (8) to cancel (cancel) the character selection effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 (9). The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command cancels (cancels) the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (10). Since the character selection effect in the first sub control unit 400 is canceled, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is not updated to the determined character C, and the information of the character A determined last time is It is held. Similarly, in the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700, the information of the character A is held.

  FIG. 6C is a view showing an example of the configuration of the effect sound as the character selection effect in the first sub control unit 400.

  As shown in the figure, the effect sound consists of the introduction and reproduction unit 850 and the loop reproduction unit 852. In one character selection effect, the introduction and reproduction unit 850 is reproduced once and then the loop reproduction unit 852 is repeated a predetermined number of times. End.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the character selection effect is canceled (cancelled) halfway, for example, when an interruption occurs during the reproduction of the introduction and reproduction unit 850, the introduction and reproduction unit 850 is cancelled. The loop playback unit 852 also cancels), but if an interrupt occurs during playback of the loop playback unit 852, playback of the loop playback unit 852 may be continued. Further, when an interruption occurs during the reproduction of the introduction and reproduction unit 850, the loop reproduction unit 852 may be canceled without canceling the introduction and reproduction unit 850. As described above, when the effect sound is composed of a plurality of parts, there may be a case where cancellation is not performed and a case where cancellation is performed depending on the part.

  Also, as shown in (d) of the figure, when the playback time is set for each of the effects (sounds A to C), an interruption (from the start of the output of the effect sound to the lapse of the set time) When a cancellation factor occurs, the subsequent output may be cancelled. The reproduction time is an example, and may be shorter than this.

Also, in the figures (c) and (d), the effect sound has been described as an example, but it can be implemented similarly even in the case of animation.
<Example 4 of Timing Chart of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 70 shows another example of the timing chart of the character change effect, which is an example in the case where control is executed based on a command from the first sub control unit 400 (control led by the first sub control unit 400). is there. The figure (a) is a case of a normal character change presentation, and the figure (b) shows the timing chart when a predetermined | prescribed interruption exists during execution of a character change presentation.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub control unit A command 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub control unit 400 sends the liquid crystal control unit 700 A liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown).

  When the decision button 136 is operated in the temporary selection state of the character C, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the character C determined this time, and causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to Send a command (3). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (4). At this timing, the first sub control unit 400 starts the execution of the character selection effect (4). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to start executing the character selection effect of the character C (5). The first sub control unit 400 ends the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 when the predetermined execution time ends (7), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the predetermined execution time. Then, the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is ended (7).

  In the figure (b), the timings (1) to (5) are the same as the figure (a), so the explanation is omitted, and the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is executed. If an interrupt (cancellation factor) occurs during that time, the first sub control unit 400 cancels (cancels) the character selection effect, and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (6). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command cancels the character selection effect (7).

In the present embodiment, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at the start of the character selection effect (timing (3)). Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state based on the update of the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 (timing (4)). Therefore, even if an interruption occurs during execution of the character selection effect and the character selection effect is canceled, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700) is newly determined. The updated character (here, character C) is maintained. Such a configuration of the character selection effect may be included.
<Example 1 of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the character change presentation corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 68 (a) in time series.

  The timing shown in the figure (a) shows the state in the change game, the timing shown in the figure (b) shows the state in the change stop, and the figure (c) is a notification to display the menu screen during the change stop. A state is shown in which an image 880 (here, an image imitating the determination button 136 and an image formed of characters such as “menu screen display”) is displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (d) shows a state in which the decision button 136 is operated, and a menu screen for setting the volume adjustment, member registration, and character (character) change is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 68E is a state in which character change is selected and a character introduction effect is being executed, and shows a state prior to the timing (1) in FIG. Here, for example, the currently selected (previously determined) character (palm) is displayed bright on the front, the character (princess) is displayed on the right rear and the character (palm) is displayed dark on the left rear.

  The timing shown in FIG. 68 (f) is a state in which the selection button 136a is operated, and shows the timing (1) in FIG. 68 (a).

  The timing shown in FIG. 68 (g) is a state in which the character (爺) is selected (temporarily selected) by the operation of the selection button 136a during the character introduction effect, and the timing of (2) in FIG. It shows. The temporarily selected character (爺) is displayed bright on the front, the character (殿) on the right rear and the character (hime) on the left rear.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure is a state in which the decision button 136 is operated, and shows the timing of (3) in FIG. 68 (a). Thus, the character (爺) is selected and determined.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection determination of the character (爺), and shows the timing of (5) in FIG. 68 (a). The liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the character (爺) brightly on the front and also performs a character selection effect to display a character of a balloon of "Wait for a while !!", and the first sub control The part 400 outputs the effect sound of "I'll leave it to you!" From the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure is a state immediately before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and shows the timing of (6) to (7) of FIG. 68 (a).

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure shows a state where the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends and the menu screen shown in (d) of the figure is displayed again.

The timings shown in (l) and (m) in FIG. 6 indicate that the starting opening (eg, the first special drawing starting opening 230 and / or the second special drawing starting opening 232 etc.) is displayed while the menu screen shown in FIG. ) Shows that the game ball has won a prize ((l) in the same figure), and the next variation game has started ((m) in the same figure).
<Example 2 of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the character change presentation corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 68 (b) in time series.

  Since the timing shown to the same figure (a)-(h) is the same as the timing shown to FIG. 71 (a)-(h) respectively, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection determination of the character (爺), and shows the timing of (5) in FIG. 68 (b). The liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the character (爺) brightly on the front and also performs a character selection effect to display a character of a balloon of "Wait for a while !!", and the first sub control The part 400 outputs the effect sound of "I'll leave it to you!" From the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in FIG. 68 (j) is a state in which the game ball is won in the starting opening before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and the timing of (6) in FIG. It shows.

The timing shown in FIG. 68 (k) indicates the timing after (7) in FIG. 68 (b). That is, the character selection effect is canceled on the way, and the state where the fluctuation game accompanying the winning of the starting opening is started is shown.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined interrupt occurs during execution of the character selection effect, the character selection effect is canceled. In this example, the detection of the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening or the start of the fluctuation game based thereon) is the interruption factor. In the character selection effect, the effect display by the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also stopped, and the effect sound by the first sub control unit 400 is also stopped ((i) in the figure).
<Example 3 of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, another example of the character change presentation corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 68 (b).

  Since the timing shown to the same figure (a)-(h) is the same as the timing shown to FIG. 71 (a)-(h) respectively, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The timings shown in (i) and (j) in the figure are the states in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection determination of the character (爺), and show the timing of (5) in FIG. . The liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the character (爺) brightly on the front and also performs a character selection effect to display a character of a balloon of "Wait for a while !!", and the first sub control The part 400 outputs the effect sound of "I'll leave it to you!" From the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in FIG. 68 (k) is a state in which the game ball is won in the starting opening before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and the timing shown by (6) in FIG. It shows.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure indicates the timing after (7) in FIG. 68 (b). That is, the character selection effect is canceled on the way, and the state where the fluctuation game accompanying the winning of the starting opening is started is shown.

  As shown in (i) and (j) of the figure, there may be a case where the character selection effect is canceled in the middle of the effect (see FIG. 69 (c)) or the like in which the effect sound is repeatedly reproduced.

  FIG. 74 shows an example of the various setting screen. Instead of the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 67 (a), the setting screen of FIG. 67 may be displayed.

  (A) to (c) are a display example where the menu screen display is suggested after the change stop (the same figure (a)), a display example of the menu screen based on it (the same figure (b)), and a menu screen The example of a display of the selected setting screen (the figure (c)). Further, the setting screens of (d) to (g) of FIG. 6 may be displayed as selection items of the menu screen (setting screen corresponding to (c) of FIG. Further, as shown in FIGS. 7 (h) and 5 (i), it is assumed that setting screens (FIGS. 6 (i) to 6 (k) etc. are displayed without the intervention of the menu screen (FIG. 6 (b)). It is also good.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes an operation means (for example, the determination button 136), a rendering means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and a control means (for example, , The first sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects, and the control means is at least changeable to a plurality of types of states At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect relating to the selected one), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first effect. A selection state (for example, a state in which a character selection effect is being executed (a state in which the character A is selected in the temporary selection state, a state in which no character is selected, etc.)), At least one of the plurality of types of states is a second selection state (for example, a state in which a character selection effect is being executed), and the effect means is configured to execute the first condition when the first condition is satisfied. The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated, and the control means is the first case. First control (control for changing the first selection state to the second selection state, control for changing the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 (for example, changing the non-selection state to the character B Or means for performing at least control to change the character A to the character B, execution control of character selection effect, etc.), and the control means is means for not performing at least the first control in the second case. And the first control is at least control including control to change the first selected state to the second selected state, and in the first case, from the establishment of the last first condition The first time has elapsed, and in the second case, the second condition has been established before the first time has elapsed since the first condition was established (design fluctuation start, during a big hit) In the case of the next R start in the selection effect, the end of the R, the end of the big hit / small hit, passing of the game ball to the gate for operating a continuous product actuation device), the first effect is the above It is an effect to be started before the first time period elapses from the establishment of the first condition.

  In addition, after the big hit symbol is stopped, the service product actuating device operating gate is a mechanism serving as a trigger for opening the attacker. After the jackpot symbol is stopped, the condition device is activated, and when the game ball passes the gate for operating the item continuous operation device, processing such as opening the attacker is performed by operating the item continuous operation device. .

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is ended, and when changing the character, keep the game interval open and hold down the player's irritability There are times when you can. In addition, the player is ended by the elapse of the effect period for which the character selection effect is scheduled by displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen, and the character change (update of the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400) Can recognize that the In other words, when the character selection effect is canceled (without displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen) and the symbol variation display is started, the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 It can be recognized that the player can not change the character (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400) before the player notices.

  Further, the first effect is an effect relating to the second selection state (for example, a character selection effect to be executed before the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is changed (updated)), and the character selection Also included are speeches and sound effects specific to the selected character (character B) to be executed at the time of presentation. The effects relating to the second selection state also include speeches and sound effects specific to (character B) in the case where the cursor is moved from character A to character B (temporary selection state).

  Further, the first effect may be an effect including at least an effect of outputting a sound. Further, the first effect may be an effect including at least an effect of displaying an image.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is ended, and when changing the character, keep the game interval open and hold down the player's irritability There are times when you can.

  Further, the control means may be means for not changing at least the second selected state in the second case.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is ended, and when changing the character, keep the game interval open and hold down the player's irritability There are times when you can. In addition, the player is ended by the elapse of the effect period for which the character selection effect is scheduled by displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen, and the character change (update of the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400) Can recognize that the In other words, when the character selection effect is canceled (without displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen) and the symbol variation display is started, the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 It can be recognized that the player can not change the character (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400) before the player notices.

  Further, the second condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when symbol variation display is performed. Here, the symbol variation display also includes the rotation start of the reel of the slot machine.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect of symbol variation display), and the effect means is of the second condition (for example, symbol variation start condition) It may be a means capable of at least starting execution of the second effect when it is established.

  With such a configuration, the player changes the character (the first sub-control unit) when the character selection effect is canceled and the symbol variation display or the like is started (without another demonstration screen or setting screen being displayed). Since it can be recognized that the update of the internal selection state of 400 has not been performed, occurrence of a situation where a character change (update of the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400) is performed without the player being aware It can be reduced.

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine.

  The game stand of the present embodiment cancels the effect when a predetermined interrupt occurs during the effect (character change effect) executed when the character is changed, and in particular, during the character change effect If a predetermined interruption occurs during the character selection effect to be executed after the character is selected and determined, the selection is canceled. In addition, when a predetermined interruption occurs during the character introduction effect which makes the player recognize the selectable character during the character change effect, the effect may be canceled.

  The predetermined interruption is, for example, the start of symbol variation (special figure variation), and when the symbol variation starts during the character change presentation (in particular, the character selection presentation after the character is selected and determined), the character change is cancelled. . By making it impossible to change the character until the end of the symbol variation, it may be possible to hold the gambling feeling by opening a game interval when changing the character.

  In addition, with "predetermined interruption" which becomes a cancellation factor of character selection production, winning a prize to special figure starting port (for example, 1st special figure starting port 230 and / or 2nd special figure starting port 232), random number Acquisition, command transmission to first sub control unit 400, command reception of first sub control unit 400, command analysis of first sub control unit 400, execution processing of the command (for example, command transmission to liquid crystal control unit 700) The command reception of the liquid crystal control unit 700, the command analysis of the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the execution processing of the command are performed (detected).

  Further, the cancellation factor of the character selection effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a predetermined process in the liquid crystal control unit 700 such as an execution process of a command in the liquid crystal control unit 700 in the predetermined interrupt.

  The cause of cancellation of the internal information update (update of internal selection information) of the first sub-control unit 400 is determined by the predetermined process in the first sub-control unit 400, such as command execution processing in the first sub-control unit 400. Included in the interrupt.

  In addition, after the character selection determination operation by the determination button 136, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 may change immediately. For example, if a character change effect starts in a certain round (for example, the 5th R) in the jackpot game and the character is selected and determined (changed from the character A to the character B) and the character selection effect is being executed, In the sub-control unit 400, the internal selection state is updated to the changed character (character B). Then, even if the interruption such as the change start occurs during the character selection effect and the character selection effect is canceled, the next round (for example, the sixth round) (because the internal selection state has been updated) In this case, character change may be completed (character B is selected).

  The character selection effect has a plurality of effect units (effect unit of the former stage and effect unit of the latter stage), and is canceled by a predetermined interruption during the effect execution of the former effect unit, but the effect execution of the latter stage effecter A predetermined interrupt in the middle may not be canceled. In addition, it is not canceled by the predetermined interruption during the rendering operation of the former stage rendering unit, but may be canceled by the predetermined interruption during the rendering operation of the latter stage rendering unit, either during the effect executing of any one of the former stage and the latter stage The predetermined interrupt may be canceled. For example, when the effect is the effect sound output from the speaker 120, the effect section at the front stage is an introduction section, and the effect section at the rear stage is a loop section.

  Further, although the present embodiment is configured to cancel the character selection effect when there is a predetermined interruption during the character selection effect (during the predetermined effect execution time), strictly speaking, the actual effect execution time is Also included is a configuration that cancels the character selection effect (update of the internal selection state) also when a predetermined interrupt (cancel factor) occurs near the end. That is, in consideration of the time required for command transmission / reception between the control units (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700), the character selection effect is produced when the cancellation factor occurs in the actual effect execution time + α. Also includes those that cancel.

  In addition, in the configuration in which processing is performed based on the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (control is led by the liquid crystal control unit 700), the first sub control unit 400 detects the operation of the determination button 136 and When the liquid crystal command is sent to 700, and the main control unit 300 starts to change before the first sub-control unit 400 receives the corresponding return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (when a predetermined interrupt occurs) ) May cancel the character selection effect.

  Specific examples in the case of canceling the character selection effect are listed below. For example, the character (殿) is selected and determined in the previous character change presentation, the current character change presentation is started from the character (殿), and the character is operated by the player operation (selection button 136a, 136b operation) in the character introduction presentation this time. (爺) is selected, and the character (princess) is selected by the player operation (selection button 136a, 136b operation) in the character introduction effect of this time, and the character (princess) is selected by the player operation (decision button 136) When the effect is determined during the execution of the character selection effect, the character selection state includes the following cases.

(1) The character (princess) selected and determined before the termination condition is satisfied (before the cancellation factor occurs) becomes the selected character that has been changed.

(2) Character Change The character (殿), which is the previous character determined at the start of the character change presentation, becomes the selected character that has been changed.

(3) The character (殿) which is the previous character becomes the changed selected character.

(4) The character as a default character when there is no player operation is a selected character that has been changed.
(5) None of the characters are selected.
<Other Embodiments (embodiment in which an index is added to a command)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 86, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc.) according to another embodiment (an embodiment adding an index to a command) of the present invention. A description will be given in detail of the spinning drum).

  Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 75 to FIG. 86 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the flow of data transmission / reception of the first control unit (first sub control unit 400) and the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) and the configuration of each storage area (buffer).

In this example, the combination of the first control unit (first sub-control unit 400) and the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) will be described as an example of the combination of the first control unit and the second control unit. For example, the combination of the first control means (main control unit 300) and the second control means (first sub control unit 400), the first control means (first sub control unit 400) and the second A combination of control means (second sub-control unit 500), a combination of first control means (main control unit 300) and second control means (payment control unit 600), etc. may be adopted.
<First control means (first sub control unit 400)>

  First, the first control means (first auxiliary control unit 400) will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 41, the first sub control unit 400 mainly includes the basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, and an I / O for controlling input / output of various devices. The counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, etc. is mounted. Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the first secondary control unit 400 includes a transmission data buffer 452 and a transmission buffer 454 for DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer.

Although details will be described later, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 sets data (command) in the transmission data buffer 452 in the case of “transmittable” with reference to the status register of the serial communication circuit built in the CPU 404 Do. The serial communication circuit of the CPU 404 sets a command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 stored in the transmission data buffer 452 in the DMA transfer transmission buffer 454. When the CPU 404 instructs the DMA controller to address the transfer destination and then instructs to start transfer, transfer of the command is started. The transferred command is written to the reception queue 752 of the serial communication circuit built in the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700.
Second Control Means (Liquid Crystal Control Unit 700)

  Next, the second control means (liquid crystal control unit 700) will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 41, the liquid crystal control unit 700 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and based on this control command, the entire liquid crystal control unit 700 is A CPU 704 for controlling, a RAM 708 for temporarily storing data, a control program and data for controlling the entire liquid crystal control unit 700, a ROM 506 for storing data for image display, etc. A display processor 710 is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 75A, the liquid crystal control unit 700 includes a reception queue 752 and a delivery queue 754.

Although liquid details will be described later, the CPU 704 of the crystal control unit 700 reads data (command) from the reception queue 752 when “reception completed” with reference to the status register built in the CPU 704. The liquid crystal control unit 700 analyzes the command, and when transmitting the command to the outside (for example, the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542), transfers the command to the delivery queue 754.
<Configuration of First Storage Area (Buffer)>

  Next, the configuration of the first storage area (buffer) included in the first control unit (first secondary control unit 400) will be described. Although the first storage area (buffer) of this example is constituted by the built-in RAM (RAM 408), a register, an external RAM, or the like may be applied as the first storage area (buffer).

As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the command stored in the transmission data buffer 452 of the first sub control unit 400 is composed of data type (index, information type), data length and actual data, and this transmission data buffer A plurality of commands can be stored in 452. Further, as shown in FIG. 6C, the command stored in the DMA transfer transmission buffer 454 of the first secondary control unit 400 is composed of start information, data length, data type, actual data, and checksum. A plurality of commands can be stored in the DMA transfer transmission buffer 454.
<Configuration of Second Storage Area (Queue)>

  Next, the configuration of the second storage area (queue) included in the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) will be described. Although the second storage area (queue) of this example is configured by the built-in RAM (RAM 708), a register, an external RAM, or the like may be applied as the second storage area (queue).

  As shown in FIG. 75 (d), the command stored in the reception queue 752 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is made up of start information, data length, data type, actual data, and checksum. Can store multiple commands. Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, the commands stored in the delivery queue 754 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 are composed of data lengths and actual data, and a plurality of commands can be stored in the delivery queue 754. It is.

The code of the actual data constituting the command of this example may be classified into a numerical range of 0000 to DFFF in hexadecimal and a numerical range of E000 to FFFF in hexadecimal as shown in FIG. The former numerical range is assigned as a code of actual data of the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the latter numerical range is allocated from the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the first sub control. It is allocated as a code of actual data of the command transmitted to the unit 400. Therefore, it is easy to determine whether the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700 or the command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the first sub control unit 400 according to the numerical value range of the actual data code. Can be determined.
<First processing, second processing>

  Next, the “first process” and the “second process” that can be executed by the first control unit (first auxiliary control unit 400) will be described using FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the flow of command transmission and reception. In the present example, an example in which the first sub control unit 400 executes the “first processing” and the “second processing” will be described, but other control units such as the liquid crystal control unit 700 can be executed. May be

  The “first process” is a process of setting (storing) actual data of a command to be transmitted to the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) in the transmission data buffer 452. When the CPU 404 of the first control means (the first secondary control unit 400) refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit built in the CPU 404, and the value of the status register indicates a value corresponding to "transmittable" Then, the actual data of the command to be transmitted to the second control means (liquid crystal control unit 700) is set in the transmission data buffer 452.

The “second process” adds an index (information included in the data type) to the actual data of the command set in the transmission data buffer 452, and then adds an index to the copied (copied) actual data to perform DMA This is processing for setting (storing) in the transmission buffer for transmission 454. The serial communication circuit of the first control means (the first sub-control unit 400) determines whether or not the actual data of the command is set in the transmission data buffer 452, and when the actual data is set, the actual data is While copying (copying), adding an index to the copied (copied) actual data, it is set (stored) in the DMA transfer transmission buffer 454.
<Third Process, Fourth Process>

  Next, “third processing” and “fourth processing” that can be executed by the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, although an example in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 executes the “third process” and the “fourth process” will be described, another control unit such as the first sub control unit 400 can be executed. May be

  The “third process” analyzes the command received from the first control means (first sub-control unit 400) to determine whether the command is a normal command or not, and receives the normal command as a reception queue. It is a process of reading from 752 and setting actual data in the delivery queue 754. The CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 refers to the status register incorporated in the CPU 704, and when the value of the status register indicates a value equivalent to “reception complete”, the actual value included in the command from the reception queue 752 Read data

The “fourth process” is a process of setting the actual data of the command set in the delivery queue 754 in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 708. The liquid crystal control unit 700 determines whether or not the actual data of the command is set in the delivery queue 754, and sets the actual data in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 708 when the actual data is set.
<First sub control unit main processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77A, the first sub control unit main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 77 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first secondary control unit main processing.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a reset signal from the above-described reset circuit 403, the first sub-control unit 400 performs reset start by reset interruption and executes processing according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 406. First, in step S301, initialization is performed. In this initialization, initialization of the input / output port, initialization processing of various variables (including processing of initializing variable CNT to be described later to 0) and the like are performed.

  In step S302, it is determined whether the variable CNT stored in the RAM 408 is 33 or more. If yes, the process proceeds to step S303. If not, the determination process of step S302 is repeatedly executed. Here, the variable CNT is a variable that is added every 1 ms in 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later. Therefore, the process of determining whether or not the variable CNT is 33 or more in step S302 is a process of determining whether a time of 33 ms has elapsed since the variable CNT is initialized to 0 in step S301 or step S303. It is synonymous with In step S303, after the variable CNT is initialized to 0, the process proceeds to step S304. In addition, the process of step S302 is not limited to this example, For example, you may comprise so that main loop process (step S302-S312) may be performed 3 times in 100 ms (30 times in 1 second).

  In step S304, liquid crystal control data analysis processing is performed. In the liquid crystal control data analysis processing, processing of a command received from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (processing corresponding to the above-described “third processing” and “fourth processing”) is performed. In step S305, rendering control data analysis processing is performed. In the effect control data analysis processing, processing of a command received from the second sub control unit 500 is performed.

  In step S306, an effect control main loop process is performed. Although details will be described later, in the effect control main loop processing, processing corresponding to the received command (processing corresponding to the above-mentioned “first processing”) is performed, and control of a lamp, sound, and the like is performed.

  In step S307, a lamp control main loop process is performed. In the lamp control main loop process, control related to the lamp is performed based on the lamp data set in the effect control main loop process of step S306. In step S308, a sound control main loop process is performed. In the sound control main loop process, control related to a sound (sound) is performed based on the sound data set in the effect control main loop process of step S306.

  In step S309, lamp driver processing is performed. In the lamp driver process, control of light output from the various lamps 418 and 440 is performed based on the lamp control information set in the lamp control main loop process of step S307. In step S310, a sound driver process is performed. In this sound driver process, based on the sound control information set in the sound control main loop process of step S308, the control of the sound output from the speaker 120 via the sound control circuit 431 is performed.

  In step S311, liquid crystal control communication driver processing is performed. In the liquid crystal control communication driver process, the process corresponding to the above-mentioned "second process" and the like are performed. In step S312, the effect control unit communication driver processing is performed. In this effect control communication driver process, after processing such as transmitting a command to the second sub control unit 500 is performed, the process proceeds to step S302.

The first secondary control unit 400 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S302 to S312 except for interruption due to command reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, or DMA interrupt processing described later. .
<Command reception interrupt processing>

  Next, a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6B is a flow chart showing the flow of the command reception interrupt process.

The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first secondary control unit 400 triggered by a command reception interrupt that occurs when a command from the main control unit 300 is received. In step S401, after the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command, the process is ended.
<1 ms timer interrupt processing>

  Next, 1 ms timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure (c) is a flowchart which shows the flow of 1 ms timer interruption processing.

The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once in a predetermined time (1 ms in this example), and executes the 1 ms timer interrupt process triggered by this timer interrupt. Do. In step S501, after the process of adding 1 to the variable CNT provided in the RAM 406 is performed, the process ends.
<10 ms timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a 10 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure (d) is a flowchart which shows the flow of 10 ms timer interruption processing.

The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once in a predetermined time (10 ms in this example), and executes the 10 ms timer interrupt process triggered by the timer interrupt. Do. In step S601, the first sensor reading process is performed, and in the next step S602, the process ends after the second sensor reading process is performed. Here, in the first sensor reading process, for example, processing of acquiring detection signals of various switches via the sensor circuit 428 and storing the acquired detection signals in the RAM 408 is performed. Further, in the second sensor reading process, processing for acquiring detection signals of other switches and storing the acquired detection signals in the RAM 408 is performed.
<DMA interrupt processing>

  Next, DMA interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6E is a flowchart showing the flow of DMA interrupt processing.

The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a DMA interrupt that notifies the end of DMA transfer, and executes the DMA interrupt process triggered by the DMA interrupt. In step S701, after the various processes associated with the end of the DMA transfer are performed, the process ends.
<Effect control main loop processing>

  Next, the effect control main loop processing (step S306) in the first auxiliary control unit main processing will be described using FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of effect control main loop processing.

In step S801, transmission data setting processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this transmission data setting process, a process corresponding to the above-mentioned "first process" is performed. Also, in step S802, after the other effect control main loop process has been performed, the process ends.
<Transmission data setting process>

  Next, the transmission data setting process (step S801) in the effect control main loop process will be described using FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of transmission data setting processing.

  In this transmission data setting processing, processing corresponding to the above-mentioned "first processing" (processing for setting (storing) actual data of a command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 in the transmission data buffer 452) is executed.

Specifically, in step S 901, the status register of the serial communication circuit built in CPU 404 is referred to, and the value is transmitted to liquid crystal control unit 700 when the value of the status register indicates a value corresponding to “transmittable”. The actual data of the command to be sent is set in the transmission data buffer 452. Also, in step S902, after the other transmission data setting process is performed, the process ends.
<Liquid crystal control communication driver processing>

  Next, the liquid crystal control communication driver process (step S311) in the first sub control unit main process will be described using FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 79 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of liquid crystal control communication driver processing.

  In this liquid crystal control communication driver processing, processing equivalent to the above-mentioned “second processing” (adding an index (information included in the data type) to actual data of the command set in the transmission data buffer 452, and copying ( An index is also added to the copied actual data, and processing (setting) is performed in the DMA transfer transmission buffer 454.

  Specifically, in step 1001, it is determined whether or not the DMA controller is in the process of DMA transfer. If the DMA transfer is in progress, the process ends. If the DMA transfer is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1002. In step S1002, it is determined whether there is data (actual data of a command) in the transmission data buffer 452. If there is data, the process proceeds to step S1003 to perform packetization processing (details will be described later). In the case, the process proceeds to step S1004.

In step S1004, it is determined whether or not there is data to be DAM transferred in the DMA transfer transmission buffer 454. If there is no corresponding data, the process ends. If there is corresponding data, the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, DMA transfer is started, and in the next step S1006, after the transmission data buffer 452 is cleared, in step S1007, other liquid crystal control communication driver processing is executed, and then the processing is terminated.
<Packetization process>

  Next, the liquid crystal control communication driver process (step S311) in the first auxiliary control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). FIG. 79 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of liquid crystal control communication driver processing.

  In step S1101, after the actual data of the command set in the transmission data buffer 452 is set in the DMA transfer transmission buffer 452, an index is added to the actual data in step S1102. In the present embodiment, the numerical range of the index to be added to the actual data is set to 00 to 1F in hexadecimal.

After the actual data is copied (copied) in step S 1103 and set in the DMA transfer transmission buffer 452, an index is added to the copied actual data in step S 1104. In step S1105, after the other packetization process is performed, the process ends.
<Liquid crystal control data analysis process>

  Next, referring to FIG. 80, the liquid crystal control data analysis process (step S304) in the first auxiliary control unit main process will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a flow of liquid crystal control data analysis processing.

  In this liquid crystal control data analysis process, the command received from the process (liquid crystal control unit 700) corresponding to the above-mentioned "third process" is analyzed to determine whether the command is a normal command or not. A process of reading a command from the reception queue 752 and setting actual data in the delivery queue 754) and processing equivalent to the above-mentioned "fourth process" (actual data of the command set in the delivery queue 754) A process of setting in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 708 is executed. In the present example, the first auxiliary control unit 400 plays a role as "second control means".

  Specifically, in step S1201, the CPU 704 refers to the status register built in the CPU 704, and determines whether the value of the status register corresponds to "reception complete". As a result of the determination, if there is no received data, the process ends, and if there is received data, the process proceeds to step S1202.

  In step S1202, processing (command analysis processing) for analyzing the received command acquired from the reception queue 752 is executed. In this command analysis process, “index determination is performed to determine whether the“ error determination ”that determines whether the actual data included in the acquired command is normal data and the value of the index added to the actual data. Two determinations of "determination" are performed.

  If it is determined in step S1203 that the command is a legitimate command as a result of the “error determination”, the process proceeds to step S1204. If it is determined that the command is not a legitimate command, the process returns to step S1201 Continue processing the received data. If it is determined in step S 1204 that the index values match as a result of the “index determination”, the process proceeds to step S 1205. If it is determined that the index values do not match, the process returns to step S 1201. Continue processing the data.

In step S1205, the data length and actual data included in the command are set (stored) in the delivery queue 754, and in step S1206, the index is overwritten. In step S1206, other command analysis processing is executed, and the processing ends. In the other command analysis processing, it is determined whether or not actual data of the command is set in the delivery queue 754, and when the actual data is set, processing of setting the actual data in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 708 is performed.
<Example 1 of Index Determination>

  Next, Example 1 of the above-mentioned "index determination" will be described using FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the flow of index determination according to the first embodiment.

  In this example, the index determination value is stored in the storage means (in this example, the RAM 708) of the second control means (in this example, the liquid crystal control unit 700) on the command receiving side. It is determined whether or not the determination value and the value of the index included in the received command match, and when both match, the command is fetched. As the index determination value, an initial value (00 in this example) is set in the initialization process of the second control means. Also, each time a command is received normally, it is updated to a new value, and in this example, 1 is added to the index determination value each time a command is received normally.

  In the state shown in FIG. 6A, the reception queue 752 of the second control means (liquid crystal control unit 700) receives the command N (index 00) → command N (index 00) → command A (index 01) → command The commands are set in the order of A (index 01) → command Z (index 02) → command Z (index 02). In this state, the index determination value is an initial value (00 in this example).

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) has acquired the first command N (index 00) from the reception queue 752. In this state, the index judgment value is 00, the value of the index included in the command N is 00, and both indexes match, so the command N of the reception queue 752 is handed over as shown in FIG. The index determination value is updated to 01 by setting it in the queue 754 and adding 1 to the index determination value.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) has acquired the second command N (index 00) from the reception queue 752. In this state, the index determination value is 01, the value of the index included in the command N is 00, and both indexes do not match, so the command N of the reception queue 752 is not set in the delivery queue 754, and the index determination is performed. Do not update the value.

Further, the state shown in FIG. 6E is a state in which the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) has acquired the first command A (index 01) from the reception queue 752. In this state, the index determination value is 01, the value of the index included in the command A is 01, and both indexes match, so that the command A of the reception queue 752 is handed over as shown in FIG. The index determination value is updated to 02 by setting 1 in the queue 754 and adding 1 to the index determination value.
<Example 2 of Index Determination>

  Next, Embodiment 2 of the above-described "index determination" will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the flow of index determination according to the second embodiment.

  In this example, the index determination value is stored in the storage means (in this example, the RAM 708) of the second control means (in this example, the liquid crystal control unit 700) on the command receiving side. It is determined whether or not the determination value matches the value of the index included in the received command, and when the two do not match (when the two are different), the command is fetched. As the index determination value, an initial value (1F in this example) is set in the initialization process of the second control means. Also, each time a command is received normally, it is updated to a new value, and in this example, the index included in the command received normally is configured to be set as the index determination value.

  In the state shown in FIG. 6A, the reception queue 752 of the second control means (liquid crystal control unit 700) receives the command N (index 00) → command N (index 00) → command A (index 01) → command The commands are set in the order of A (index 01) → command Z (index 02) → command Z (index 02). In this state, the index determination value is an initial value (1F in this example).

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) has acquired the first command N (index 00) from the reception queue 752. In this state, the index determination value is 1F, the value of the index included in the command N is 00, and both indexes do not match, so the command N of the reception queue 752 is handed over as shown in FIG. The index determination value is updated to 00 by setting it in the queue 754 and setting the index 00 included in the normally received command N as the index determination value.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) has acquired the second command N (index 00) from the reception queue 752. In this state, since the index determination value is 00, the value of the index included in the command N is 00, and both indexes match, the command N of the reception queue 752 is not set in the delivery queue 754, and the index determination is performed. Do not update the value.

Further, the state shown in FIG. 6E is a state in which the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) has acquired the first command A (index 01) from the reception queue 752. In this state, the index determination value is 00, the value of the index included in the command A is 01, and both indexes do not match, so the command A of the reception queue 752 is handed over as shown in FIG. The index determination value is updated to 01 by setting it in the queue 754 and setting the index 01 included in the normally received command A as the index determination value.
<Example 3 of Index Determination>

  Next, Embodiment 3 of the above-mentioned "index determination" will be described using FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the flow of index determination according to the third embodiment.

  In this example, the same determination as the index determination according to the second embodiment described above is performed, but the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) shuts off the power (power supply) just before the timing shown in FIG. A case will be described in which a break occurs and the index determination value is set to the initial value (1F in this example) in the initialization processing at the time of power recovery (power recovery).

  In the state shown in (a) of the figure, the reception queue 752 of the second control means (liquid crystal control unit 700), command N (index 1E) → command N (index 1E) → command A (index 1F) → command The commands are set in the order of A (index 1F) → command Z (index 00) → command Z (index 00). In this state, the index determination value is 1D.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the second control means (liquid crystal control unit 700) has acquired the first command N (index 1E) from the reception queue 752. In this state, since the index determination value is 1D, the value of the index included in the command N is 1E, and the two indexes do not match, the command N of the reception queue 752 is handed over as shown in FIG. The index determination value is updated to 1E by setting it in the queue 754 and setting the index 1E included in the command N received normally to the index determination value.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) acquires the second command N (index 1E) from the reception queue 752. In this state, since the index determination value is 1E, the value of the index included in the command N is 1E, and both indexes match, the command N of the reception queue 752 is not set in the delivery queue 754, and the index determination is performed. Do not update the value.

Further, in the state shown in (e) of the figure, the second control means (liquid crystal control unit 700) generates power interruption (power interruption), and the index determination is made in the initialization processing at power recovery (power recovery). In this state, the initial value (1F in this example) is set, and the command N set in the reception queue 752 is erased. In this state, the index determination value is 1F, the value of the index included in the command A is 1F, and both indexes match, so the command A of the reception queue 752 is not set in the delivery queue 754, and the index determination is performed. Do not update the value. For this reason, in this example, the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) can not normally receive the command A.
<Example 4 of Index Determination>

  Next, Embodiment 4 of the above-described "index determination" will be described with reference to Figs.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a flow of packetization processing according to the modification, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 79 (b). The same processing as the packetization processing shown in FIG. 79 (b) is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In step S1110 of the packetization process according to the modification, it is determined whether or not the value of the index set in the command to be transmitted first is a hexadecimal FE, and if it corresponds, the process proceeds to step S1111, A hexadecimal FF is configured to be set as the index value to be set to the command to be transmitted for the second time.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a flow of liquid crystal control data analysis processing according to a modification, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. The same processes as the liquid crystal control data analysis process shown in FIG. 80 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In step S1210 of the liquid crystal control data analysis process according to the modification, the transmitter index value (index value of the transmitted command) and the receiver index value (index stored in the storage unit of the second control unit on the reception side) If the two are different, step S1205 is performed only if the transmitting side index value is a hexadecimal FF and the receiving side index value is not a hexadecimal FE. It is configured to perform the following processing.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flow of index determination according to the fourth embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 6A, the reception queue 752 of the second control means (liquid crystal control unit 700) is operated as follows: Command N (Index FE) → Command N (Index FF) → Command A (Index 00) → Command The commands are set in the order of A (index 00) → command Z (index 01) → command Z (index 01). In this state, the index determination value is an initial value (FD in this example).

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 7B is a state in which the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) has acquired the first command N (index FE) from the reception queue 752. In this state, the index determination value is FD, the value of the index included in the command N is FE, and both indexes do not match, so the command N of the reception queue 752 is handed over as shown in FIG. The index determination value is updated to FE by setting it in the queue 754 and setting the index FE included in the normally received command N as the index determination value.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the second control unit (liquid crystal control unit 700) has acquired the second command N (index FF) from the reception queue 752. In this state, the index determination value is FE, the value of the index included in the command N is FF, the two indexes are different, the transmitting index is a hexadecimal FF, and the receiving index is a hexadecimal Because of FE, the command N of the reception queue 752 is not set in the delivery queue 754 and the index determination value is not updated.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 6E is a state in which the second control means (liquid crystal control unit 700) has acquired the first command A (index 00) from the reception queue 752. In this state, the index determination value is FE, the value of the index included in the command A is 00, and the two indexes are different. Therefore, as shown in (f), the command A of the reception queue 752 is handed over. The index determination value is updated to 00 by setting it in the queue 754 and setting the index 00 included in the command A received normally as the index determination value.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes the first control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400) and the second control unit (for example, the liquid crystal control unit) 700), and the first control means is means capable of executing a plurality of types of processing, and among the plurality of types of processing that can be executed by the first control means, One process is a first process, and one process of the plurality of types of processes executable by the first control means is a second process, and the first process is a first process. The command to which the identification information is added is transmitted to the second control means a plurality of times, and the second process is the first process each time the command to be sent to the second control means changes. The process of updating the identification information to a different value within a certain range of values, and the second control method Is a means having storage means capable of storing at least second identification information, the second control means is means capable of executing a plurality of types of processing, and the second control means is executable. One of the plurality of types of processing is the third processing, and one of the plurality of types of processing that can be executed by the second control unit is the fourth processing. One of the plurality of types of processing that can be executed by the second control unit is the fifth processing, and one of the plurality of types of processing that can be executed by the second control unit is the first processing. The third process is a process of receiving from the first control means a command to which the first identification information is added, and the fourth process is storing in the storage means When the second identified identification information is different from the received first identification information The processing is for storing the command to which the first identification information is added in the storage unit, and the fifth processing is to receive the second identification information each time the command is stored in the storage unit. And updating the first identification information, and the sixth process is performed when the second identification information stored in the storage means matches the received first identification information. And a process of discarding a command to which the first identification information is added, and one of a plurality of types of processes that can be executed by the first control means is a first exception process. In the first exception processing, after transmitting a command to which the first identification information consisting of a first value (for example, a hexadecimal number FE) is added to the second control means, the first value is A first identifier consisting of a different second value (for example, hexadecimal FF) It is processing (for example, processing of steps S1102 to S1104 and S1110 to S1111 of packet processing shown in FIG. 84) to which the same command as the command to which other information is added is transmitted (for example, processing of the second One of the plurality of types of processing that can be executed by the control unit is a second exception processing, and one of the plurality of types of processing that can be executed by the second control unit is The second exception process is the third identification process, and the second exception process is the second identification information composed of a third value (for example, hexadecimal FD) different from any of the first value and the second value. Is stored in the storage means as an initial value (for example, a process of setting a hexadecimal FD as an index determination value in FIG. 86 (a)), and the third exception process is stored in the storage means The Even if the second identification information is different from the received first identification information, the second identification information is the first value, and the first identification information is The second value is a process of discarding the command to which the first identification information is added (for example, the process of steps S1210 to S1212 of the liquid crystal control data analysis process shown in FIG. 85). It is a game console.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reliably and accurately transmit the command (control command) of the first control means to the second control means, and stable game control can be performed. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to realize a game console characterized by control means. Further, after transmitting a command to which the first identification information consisting of the first value is added to the second control means by the first exception processing, the second value is generated by the second value different from the first value. In the case where the second control means can receive the second command even if the second control means can not receive the first command because the same command as the command with the one identification information added is transmitted to the second control means There is a possibility that stable game control can be performed because it is possible to avoid the drop of the command by the second control means. In addition, even if the stored second identification information and the received first identification information differ due to the second and third exception processing, the second identification information is the first. The second control means is identical because it is configured to discard the command to which the first identification information is added when it is a value and the first identification information is a second value. There is a case where stable game control can be performed without redundantly receiving the command of.

  The first exception handling, the second exception handling, and the third exception handling may be processes executed immediately after the power is turned on. The third value may be a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the second value, and the second value may be a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the first value. The display device (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 or the like) may be provided, and the second control device may be a device capable of controlling the display device.

  Further, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a first control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400) and a second control unit (for example, the liquid crystal control unit 700). The first control means is means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of processing, and at least one of the plurality of types of processing executable by the first control means. Is a first process, and at least one of a plurality of types of processes that can be executed by the first control means is a second process, and a plurality of types of processes that can be executed by the first control means And at least one of the first processing is the first data obtained by adding at least identification information (hereinafter referred to as "first identification information") to a command. Processing to generate (for example, the packet shown in FIG. 79 (b) (S1101 and S1102), and the second process includes second data obtained by adding at least the first identification information to the copied command (for example, packet processing shown in FIG. 79B). (Steps S1101 and S1102), and the third process transmits the first data and the second data to the second control means (for example, as shown in FIG. (c) processing of step S1005 of the liquid crystal control communication driver processing shown in a))).

  According to the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reliably and accurately transmit the command (control command) of the first control means to the second control means, and a stable game Since it is possible to perform control, there may be cases where it is possible to realize a game console characterized by control means.

  Here, the second control means is a means having storage means (for example, a RAM) capable of storing at least second identification information (for example, the index determination value shown in FIG. 82 and the like), and the second control The means is means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of processing, and at least one of the plurality of types of processing executable by the second control means is a third processing, the second control At least one of the plurality of types of processes that can be executed by the means is a fourth process, and the third process is a process of receiving the first identification information from the first control means (for example, 80 is the process of step S1202 of the liquid crystal control data analysis process shown in FIG. 80, and the fourth process stores the command when the first identification information matches the second identification information. Memorize in means Management (for example, step S1206 of the liquid crystal control data analysis process shown in FIG. 80) may be used.

  The second control means is a means having storage means (for example, the RAM 708) capable of storing at least second identification information (for example, the index determination value shown in FIG. 82 and the like), and the second control The means is means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of processing, and at least one of the plurality of types of processing executable by the second control means is a third processing, the second control At least one of the plurality of types of processes that can be executed by the means is a fourth process, and the third process is a process of receiving the first identification information from the first control means (for example, Of the liquid crystal control data analysis process shown in FIG. 85), and the fourth process stores the command when the first identification information and the second identification information are different from each other. Memory in the means To process (e.g., process in step S1206 of the liquid crystal control data analysis process shown in FIG. 85) may be used.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of processing that can be executed by the second control unit is a fifth processing, and the fifth processing is performed each time the command is stored in the storage unit. The second identification information may be updated. The fifth process may be a process of updating the second identification information to the first identification information each time the command is stored in the storage unit. Further, at least one of the plurality of types of processing that can be executed by the second control unit is a sixth processing, and the sixth processing is performed immediately after storing the command in the storage unit. It may be processing of discarding the command when the same command as the command is received.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel And a stop button for stopping rotation of the reel individually, lottery means for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is made by lottery, and rotation of the reel based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control regarding the stop of the symbol and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the internally winning combination Determining means for determining whether or not the game is performed, and payout control means for performing game medium payout processing for paying out the game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the stop mode of the symbol is the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a launcher for launching a ball in a predetermined gaming area, a winning opening configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a ball having entered the winning opening. A detection means for detecting, a payout means for paying out a ball when the detection means detects a ball, and a variable display device for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a game ball enters the winning opening to achieve a prize It is suitable also for a pachinko machine etc. which make a stop display after changing a variable display device and to make a stop display and to notify transition of a game state on the occasion of a thing.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type game machine" is used to circulate and use the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. Moreover, the case where the width of a game can be further expanded by applying the content currently described to one structure among the several structures described to the Example and embodiment to the structure of another Example and embodiment is is there.

  Further, in the present specification, when "A can perform B at least", the description states "A executes B only" and "A always executes B" At least one meaning of is included. Further, in the present specification, when the descriptions “A is at least B can be performed” and “C is at least D can be performed” are described together, “A executes only B, And C runs only D, "A runs only B, and C always runs D", "A always runs B, and C runs D At least one of the meanings of “execute only”, “A always executes B, and C always executes D” is included.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball and ball gaming machine (pachinko machine).

100 pachinko machine 120 speaker 136 chance button 137 setting operation section 208 decorative symbol display device 224 effect movable body 246 shielding device 300 main control section 400 first sub-control section 434 liquid crystal control section (VDP)
500 Second Sub Control Unit

Claims (8)

Operation means,
Means of presentation,
A game console equipped with
The operation means is a means provided at a position where the player can operate,
The rendering means is a means capable of outputting a plurality of types of sounds,
One of the plurality of types of sounds is a first sound,
One of the plurality of types of sounds is a second sound,
The aspect of the first sound and the aspect of the second sound are different aspects,
The first sound is the first sound whose output is started according to the operation when the operation means is operated in a certain operation mode in the first button effect .
The second sound is the first sound whose output is started according to the operation when the operation means is operated in a certain operation mode in the second button effect .
The first button effect and the second button effect are different button effects,
The certain operation mode is not a long press operation but a single press operation,
The time from the operation timing of the operation means to the output start timing of the second sound and the time from the operation timing of the operation means to the output start timing of the first sound are different times.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
The first sound is the first sound whose output is started according to the operation when the operation means is operated in a certain operation mode in the first state,
The second sound is the first sound whose output is started according to the operation when the operation means is operated in a certain operation mode in the second state,
The first state is a state in which the operation of the operation means is received,
The second state is a state other than the first state among the states for receiving the operation of the operation means,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein
The second state is a state in which an operation of the operation means in a button effect is received.
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
Equipped with control means,
The control means can output the first sound when detecting the one-time pressing operation by the operation means.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 4, and
The control means can output the second sound when detecting the one-time pressing operation by the operation means.
A game stand characterized by It is a game console according to claim 4 or claim 5,
The control means is capable of performing a first control,
The control means is capable of performing a second control,
The first control is control to output the first sound in a first time from the operation timing of the operation means when the operation means is operated,
The second control, when the operation means is operated, Ri control der that outputs the second sound from the operation timing of the operating means at a second time,
The first control and the second control are different controls,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by